You are on page 1of 262

AL

PDH radio systems


User manual
MN.00107.E - 017
Volume 1/ 1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017 1
Contents
Section 1.
USER GUIDE 9
1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 9
2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .........................................10
2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK....................................................................10
2.1.1 Artificial respiration.................................................................................10
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................10
2.2 SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................11
2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical & electronic equipment) ....13
2.4 INTERNAL BATTERY ..........................................................................................13
3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL............................................................14
3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL.................................................................................14
3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................14
3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................14
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION 17
4 ABBREVIATION LIST................................................................................................17
4.1 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS...................................................................................17
5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................19
5.1 RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW................................................................................19
5.1.1 General .................................................................................................19
5.2 RECOMMENDATION ..........................................................................................19
5.3 APPLICATION...................................................................................................19
5.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE....................................................................................20
5.4.1 IDU.......................................................................................................20
5.4.2 IDU Plus ................................................................................................21
5.4.3 ODU......................................................................................................21
5.5 MANAGEMENT SYSTEM......................................................................................22
5.5.1 Hardware platform..................................................................................22
5.5.2 Management ports ..................................................................................22
2 AL - MN.00107.E - 017
5.5.3 Protocols ...............................................................................................22
6 EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................26
6.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................26
7 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT ...............................................................38
7.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................38
7.2 TRIBUTARY INTERFACE .....................................................................................38
7.2.1 2 Mbit/s interface....................................................................................38
7.2.2 34 Mbit/s interface..................................................................................39
7.2.3 Ethernet interface ...................................................................................39
7.3 STM-1 INTERFACE ............................................................................................39
7.3.1 Characteristics of STM-1 electrical interface................................................40
7.4 SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE...........................................................................41
7.4.1 2 Mbit/s wayside interface........................................................................41
7.4.2 64 kbit/s codirectional interface ..............................................................41
7.4.3 64 kbit/s contradirectional interface V.11 .................................................41
7.4.4 Analogue interface ..................................................................................42
7.4.5 9600 bit/s low speed synchronous/asynchronous data .................................42
7.4.6 9600 or 2x4800 bit/s low speed asynchronous data.....................................42
7.4.7 Alarm interface.......................................................................................42
7.4.8 Network Management Interface ................................................................43
7.5 MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR.............................................................................44
7.6 CABLE INTERFACE ............................................................................................44
7.7 AVAILABLE LOOPS............................................................................................44
8 DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT FOR 2, 8, 34 Mbit/s AND Nx2 Mbit/s SIGNALS..
45
8.1 1+0/1+1 STANDARD IDU VERSION ....................................................................45
8.1.1 LIM.......................................................................................................45
8.1.2 Circuit description ...................................................................................45
8.1.3 RIM.......................................................................................................48
8.1.3.1 QAM modulator ........................................................................48
8.1.3.2 QAM demodulator.....................................................................48
8.1.3.3 Power supply ...........................................................................48
8.1.3.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................48
8.1.4 CONTROLLER .........................................................................................49
8.1.4.1 Service signals.........................................................................49
8.1.4.2 Equipment software..................................................................49
8.1.4.3 Supervision ports .....................................................................50
8.2 IDU LOOPS......................................................................................................50
8.2.1 Tributary loop.........................................................................................50
8.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................50
8.2.3 IDU loop................................................................................................51
9 DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT IDU PLUS FOR Nx2MBIT/S STREAMS HIERAR-
CHIC AND NOT HIERARCHIC61
9.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................61
9.2 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 1RU.......................................................................61
9.3 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 2RU.......................................................................62
9.4 1RU TERMINAL.................................................................................................62
9.5 2RU TERMINAL.................................................................................................63
AL - MN.00107.E - 017 3
9.6 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY INTERFACE.........................................................................63
9.7 TERMINAL STM1+16E1 (1RU and 2RU)................................................................63
9.8 DROP-INSERT (2RU) .........................................................................................64
9.9 NODAL (UP TO 3X2RU)......................................................................................65
9.10 LIM.................................................................................................................66
9.11 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION......................................................................................66
9.12 RIM ................................................................................................................68
9.12.1 QAM modulator ......................................................................................68
9.12.2 QAM demodulator ...................................................................................68
9.12.3 Power supply..........................................................................................68
9.12.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU ................................................................................69
9.13 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER..................................................................................69
9.13.1 Service signals .......................................................................................69
9.13.2 Equipment software ................................................................................69
9.13.3 Supervision ports....................................................................................70
9.14 IDU LOOPS......................................................................................................70
9.14.1 Tributary loop.........................................................................................71
9.14.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................71
9.14.3 IDU loop................................................................................................71
9.15 EXPANSION 53E1 .............................................................................................71
9.16 SERVICE CHANNEL ADAPTER .............................................................................71
9.17 PROCESSOR 53E1.............................................................................................71
10 DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT FOR
2 Mbit/s AND ETHERNET SIGNALS77
10.1 1+0/1+1 STANDARD IDU VERSION WITH ETHERNET INTERFACE............................77
10.1.1 LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s for 2 Mbit/s signals ..................................................77
10.1.2 Circuit description ...................................................................................77
10.1.3 LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s for Ethernet signals..................................................80
10.1.3.1 2 Mbit/s tributaries...................................................................80
10.1.3.2 Electrical Ethernet interface .......................................................81
10.1.3.3 Front panel LEDs......................................................................81
10.1.3.4 Bridge/switch function ..............................................................81
10.1.3.5 Ethernet Full Duplex function .....................................................82
10.1.3.6 Link Loss Forwarding ................................................................82
10.1.3.7 MDI/MDIX crossover ...............................................................82
10.1.3.8 VLAN functionality ....................................................................83
10.1.3.9 Switch organized by port...........................................................83
10.1.3.10 Switch organized by VLAN ID.....................................................83
10.1.3.11 Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p........................................84
10.1.3.12 Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IPV4 ToS (DSCP) ........................85
10.1.4 RIM.......................................................................................................85
10.1.4.1 QAM modulator ........................................................................85
10.1.4.2 QAM demodulator.....................................................................85
10.1.4.3 Power supply ...........................................................................85
10.1.4.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................86
10.1.5 CONTROLLER .........................................................................................86
10.1.5.1 Service signals.........................................................................86
10.1.6 Equipment software ................................................................................86
10.1.6.1 Supervision ports .....................................................................87
10.2 IDU LOOPS......................................................................................................87
10.2.1 Tributary loop.........................................................................................87
10.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................88
4 AL - MN.00107.E - 017
10.2.3 IDU loop................................................................................................88
11 DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT FOR E/W REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT....100
11.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 100
11.2 COMPOSITION ............................................................................................... 100
11.3 IDU CHARACTERISTICS................................................................................... 101
11.3.1 Management of tributaries ..................................................................... 101
11.3.2 Capacity .............................................................................................. 101
11.3.3 E1 switching criteria.............................................................................. 101
11.4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION.................................................................................... 101
11.4.1 Matrix ................................................................................................. 102
11.4.2 Processor............................................................................................. 102
11.4.3 RIM..................................................................................................... 105
11.4.3.1 QAM modulator ...................................................................... 105
11.4.3.2 QAM demodulator................................................................... 105
11.4.3.3 Power supply ......................................................................... 105
11.4.3.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU................................................................ 105
11.4.4 CONTROLLER ....................................................................................... 106
11.4.4.1 Service signals....................................................................... 106
11.4.4.2 Equipment software................................................................ 106
11.4.4.3 Supervision ports ................................................................... 107
11.5 IDU LOOPS.................................................................................................... 107
11.5.1 Tributary loop....................................................................................... 107
11.5.2 Baseband unit loop ............................................................................... 107
11.5.3 IDU loop.............................................................................................. 108
12 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT...........................................................112
12.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 112
12.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION............................................................................. 112
13 OUTDOOR UNIT DESCRIPTION...............................................................................114
13.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 114
13.2 TRANSMIT SECTION........................................................................................ 114
13.3 RECEIVE SECTION.......................................................................................... 115
13.4 CABLE INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 115
13.5 ATPC OPERATION ........................................................................................... 115
13.6 1+1 Tx SYSTEM............................................................................................. 115
13.7 POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 116
Section 3.
INSTALLATION 123
14 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATI-
BILITY123
14.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 123
14.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................ 123
14.2.1 IDU installation..................................................................................... 123
14.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING....................................................................................... 124
14.4 GROUNDING CONNECTION.............................................................................. 125
AL - MN.00107.E - 017 5
15 USER CONNECTIONS..............................................................................................126
15.1 CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 STANDARD VERSION......................................... 126
15.2 CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0 COMPACT AND NON EXPANDABLE VERSIONS .............. 126
15.3 STANDARD VERSION CONNECTORS.................................................................. 128
15.4 1/2 UNIT COMPACT VERSION CONNECTORS ...................................................... 132
16 USER CONNECTIONS FOR IDU PLUS.......................................................................135
16.1 CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 IDU PLUS VERSION........................................... 135
17 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........141
17.1 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 141
17.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 141
17.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................................................. 142
17.4 GROUNDING.................................................................................................. 143
18 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...........155
18.1 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 155
18.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 155
18.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................................................. 155
18.4 GROUNDING.................................................................................................. 157
19 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .........166
19.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 166
19.2 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 166
19.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 166
19.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................................................. 167
19.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna ................ 167
19.4.2 Installation of ODU................................................................................ 168
19.4.3 ODU installation.................................................................................... 168
19.5 ANTENNA AIMING........................................................................................... 169
19.6 COMPATIBILITY.............................................................................................. 169
19.7 GROUNDING.................................................................................................. 169
20 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT
V32307, V32308, V32309)184
20.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 184
20.2 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 184
20.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 185
20.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................................................. 185
20.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 186
20.5.1 Setting antenna polarization................................................................... 186
20.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna......................................... 186
20.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 186
20.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 186
20.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 186
20.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 187
20.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 187
20.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 187
20.6.1 Installation of Hybrid............................................................................. 187
20.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 188
21 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT
6 AL - MN.00107.E - 017
V32323)197
21.1 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 197
21.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 197
21.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................................................. 197
Section 4.
LINE-UP 203
22 LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP .................................................................................203
22.1 LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP............................................................................ 203
22.1.1 Antenna alignment and received field measurement .................................. 203
22.1.2 Network element configuration ............................................................... 204
22.1.3 Radio checks ........................................................................................ 204
23 LINEUP OF LIM ETHERNET/2 Mbit/s ....................................................................206
23.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 206
23.2 LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER
PORT206
23.3 LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN PER
PORT211
23.4 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS ............................................................................ 214
23.5 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC........................ 214
23.6 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC .... 217
23.7 3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT ............................ 218
24 LINEUP OF LIM FOR EAST/WEST REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT .......................221
24.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 221
24.2 BASEBAND CONFIGURATION............................................................................ 221
24.3 EAST/WEST CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 222
24.4 EAST OR WEST PRESETTING............................................................................ 223
24.5 TRIBUTARY ENABLING .................................................................................... 224
24.6 ONE DIRECTION TRIBUTARY CONNECTION ........................................................ 225
24.7 PROTECTED TRIBUTARY CONNECTION .............................................................. 226
24.8 PROTECTION SETTING (Rx E1 SWITCH) ............................................................ 226
24.9 PASSTHROUGH E1 CONNECTION .................................................................... 227
Section 5.
MAINTENANCE 229
25 PERIODICAL CHECKS .............................................................................................229
25.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 229
25.2 CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT .......................................................................... 229
26 TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................230
26.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 230
AL - MN.00107.E - 017 7
26.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ..................................................................... 230
26.2.1 Loop facilities ....................................................................................... 230
26.2.2 Alarm messages processing.................................................................... 231
27 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/SAVE/DOWNLOAD. PARAMETER MODIFICA-
TION AND CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS.232
27.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 232
27.2 PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 232
27.2.1 General equipment configuration............................................................. 232
27.2.2 Addresses and routing table ................................................................... 233
27.2.3 Remote Element Table........................................................................... 234
28 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING
THE PARAMETERS235
28.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 235
28.2 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD ............................................................................... 235
28.3 CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD.......................................................................... 235
Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION 237
29 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION.......................................................................237
29.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 237
Section 7.
COMPOSITION 239
30 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT ....................................................................239
30.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 239
30.2 IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 239
30.3 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT................................................................ 240
31 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT IDU PLUS ....................................................242
31.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 242
31.2 IDU PLUS PART NUMBER ................................................................................. 242
31.3 COMPOSITION OF THE IDU PLUS...................................................................... 242
31.3.1 1+0 1RU 32E1 Terminal......................................................................... 243
31.3.2 1+1 1RU 32E1 terminal ......................................................................... 243
31.3.3 1+1 terminale 2RU 53E1........................................................................ 244
31.3.4 2RU 32E1 drop/insert ............................................................................ 244
31.3.5 Nodal 2RU STM1 E1 .............................................................................. 244
32 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................246
32.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 246
8 AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Section 8.
LISTS AND SERVICES 249
33 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................249
34 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................255
35 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................257
35.1 RQ.00961 MODULE ......................................................................................... 257
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
9
Section 1.
USER GUIDE
1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A. declares that the products:
- digital radio relay system AL4
- digital radio realy system AL7
- digital radio realy system AL8
- digital radio realy system AL11
- digital radio realy system AL13
- digital radio realy system AL15
- digital radio realy system AL18
- digital radio realy system AL23
- digital radio realy system AL25
- digital radio realy system AL28
- digital radio realy system AL32
- digital radio realy system AL38
complies with the essential requirements of article 3 of the R&TTE Directive (1999/05/EC) and therefore is
marked CE.
The following standards have been applied:
- EN 60950:200 Safety of information technology equipment.
- EN 301 4894 V.1.3.1 (20028): Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4. Specific con-
ditions for fixed radio links and ancillary equipment and services
- ETSI EN 301 751 V.1.1. (200212): Fixed Radio Systems; Pointto point equipment and antennas;
generic harmonized standard for pointtopoint digital fixed radio systems and antennas covering the
essential requirements under article 3.2 of the 1999/5/EC Directive.
10
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY
RULES
2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the con-
ductor.
2.1.1 Artificial respiration
It is important to start mouth resoutputtion at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth resoutputtion method is described in the Tab.1.
2.1.2 Treatment of burns
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
Warning
Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections
Apply dry gauze on the burns
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
11
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration
2.2 SAFETY RULES
When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain compo-
nents electrostatic charge sensitive.
Step Description Figure
1
Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (den-
tures, chewing gum, etc.).
2
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patients head and one under his neck.
Lift the patients head and let it recline backwards as far
as possible.
3
Shift the hand from the patients neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.
While performing these operations take a good supply of oxy-
gen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open
4
With your thumb between the patients chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities
5
While performing these operations observe if the patients
chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patients mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patients chest
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patients nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patients head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.
6
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of
twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
patient has regained consciousness, or until a doctor has as-
certained his death.
12
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication
In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).
Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord
The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous
for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.
Fig.4 - Laser indication
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
13
2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.5 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.
Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419
2.4 INTERNAL BATTERY
Inside the equipment, in IDU unit, there is a lithium battery.
CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries
according to law.
14
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL
The purpose of this manual consists in providing the user with information which permit to operate and
maintain the AL radio family.
Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/LCT management program win-
dows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help-on line.
3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE
The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:
a basic understanding of microwave transmission
installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system
a good knowledge of IP/OSI networks and routing policy.
3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.
Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.
Section 1 User Guide
It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.
Section 2 Description and specifications
It traces the broad line of equipment operation and lists the main technical characteristics of the whole
equipment and units it consists of.
List of abbreviation meaning is also supplied.
Section 3 Installation
The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.
The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
15
Section 4 LineUp
Lineup procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.
Section 5 Maintenance
The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the
faulty unit and to reestablish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.
Section 6 Programming and supervision
The AL radio family is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are al-
ready available, some other will be available in the future.
This section lists the tools implemented and indicates if descriptions are already available.
Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.
Section 7 Composition
Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.
Section 8 Lists and assistance
This section contains the lists of figures and tables and the assistance service information.
16
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
17
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFI-
CATION
4 ABBREVIATION LIST
4.1 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
- AF Assured Forwarding
- AL Access Link
- AIS Alarm Indication Signal
- ATPC Automaric Transmit Power Control
- BB Baseband
- BBER Background Block Error Radio
- BER Bit Error Rate
- DSCP Differentiated Service Code Point
- DSP Digital Signal Processing
- EMC/EMI Electromagnetic Compatibility/Electromagnetic Interference
- EOC Embedded Overhead Channel
- ERC European Radiocommunication Committee
- ESD Electrostatic Discharge
- FEC Forward Error Corrector
- FEM Fast Ethernet Module
- HDLC High Level Data Link Control
- IDU Indoor Unit
- IF Intermediate Frequency
- IpToS Type of Service IP
18
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
- LAN Local Area Network
- LAPS Link Access Procedure SDH
- LCT Local Craft Terminal
- LIM Line Interface Module
- LLF Link Loss Forwarding
- LOF Loss Of Frame
- LOS Loss Of Signal
- MAC Media Access Control
- MDI Medium Dependent Interface
- MDIX Medium Dependent Interface Crossover
- MIB Management Information Base
- MMIC Monolitic Microwave Integrated Circuit
- MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
- NE Network Element
- ODU Outdoor Unit
- OSI Open System Interconnection
- PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
- PPI Plesiochronous Physical Interface
- PPP Point to Point Protocol
- PTOS Priority Type Of Service
- RIM Radio Interface Module
- SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal
- SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
- TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
- TOS Type Of Service
- VID Virtual LAN Identifier
- VLAN Virtual LAN
- WFQ Wait Fair Queue
- Wayside Traffic Additional 2 Mbit/s Traffic
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
19
5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION
5.1 RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5.1.1 General
Access Link (AL) is the name of the new PDH radio family designed by SIAE for low/medium capacity trans-
mission in the overall frequency bands from 4 GHz up to 38 GHz.
Different versions offer a wide range of transmission capacity using programmable 4QAM/16QAM modula-
tion or 32QAM modulation.
Reduced cost, high reliability, compact size, light weight, fully programmability are the most outstanding
performances of these equipment.
5.2 RECOMMENDATION
The equipment complies with the following international standards:
EN 301 4894 for EMC
ITUR recommendations for all frequency bands
EN 300 1322 characteristics for power supply
EN 300 019 environmental characteristics (Operation class 3.2 for IDU and class 4.1 for ODU; stor-
age: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)
EN 60950 for safety
5.3 APPLICATION
Equipment main applications are:
Radio links inside GSM cells of mobile radio networks
Radio links for voice and data transmission
LAN Ethernet extension
Spur routes for high capacity radio systems
Emergency links.
20
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
5.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The AL equipment consists of two separate units available in different versions:
indoor unit called IDU for rack or 19 structure mounting that interfaces the input/output tributaries
and supervises the full equipment
outdoor unit called ODU for pole or wall mounting where the circuit forming the RF head take place.
The two units are interconnected via coaxial cable. Fig.6 and Fig.7 show a typical IDU/ODU layout whereas
Fig.8 shows the equipment block diagram in 1+1 configuration and Fig.9 shows the 1+0 non expandable
version.
5.4.1 IDU
The IDU is madeup in the following versions:
1+0 compact version non expandable, 1/2 unit high, capacity 2x2, 4x2 Mbit/s
1+0 compact version non expandable, 1/2 unit high, capacity 2x2, 4x2, 8x2 Mbit/s
1+0 version non expandable, 1 unit high, capacity 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s
1+0 compact version non expandable, 1/2 unit high, capacity 2 Mbit/s and 10/100BaseT
1+0/1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s
1+0/1+1 full duplicated, 2 unit high, capacity 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s
1+0/1+1, 2 unit high, capacity 32x2 Mbit/s
1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 34/2x34 Mbit/s
1+0/1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 4x2 and 3x10/100BaseT
The IDU consists of LIM, CONTROLLER, RIM modules, plugin inserted into a wired shelf.
In the 1+0 compact version LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM functions are integrated in a single module. Following
functionality description covers both 1+0 compact and 1+0/1+1 standard versions.
The LIM interfaces the in/out tributaries and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit insertion (bit
extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator (from the demodulator). In
addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator.
Moreover the module duplicates the main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the receive
side in the 1+1 version.
The RIM contains:
the IF section of the 4QAM/16QAM programmable modemodulator or 32QAM in alternative;
the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and
send the battery voltage towards the ODU;
the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting
cable.
The Controller performs the following:
interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, 2 Mbit/s (details are given
in the system technical specification)
contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment function-
ality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU
interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports
receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
21
5.4.2 IDU Plus
The IDU Plus is made up of the following versions:
terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2x2 Mbit/s up to 32x2 Mbit/s capacity with up to 32E1 Mbit/s interface,
subrack 1RU
terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2x2 Mbit/s up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity with up to 53E1 Mbit/s interface,
subrack 2RU
drop-insert 1+0, 1+1, 4x(1+0), up to 4x53x2 Mbit/s capacity, that is passthrough up to 212x2
Mbit/s streams plus drop-insert up to 32x2 Mbit/s or up to 53x2 Mbit/s or up to 79x2 Mbit/s with
STM1+16E1 interface, equipped with matrix into 2RU
nodal, up to 3xIDU Plus can be joined in a mode giving full switching capabilitiesto all the 2 Mbit/s
streams coming from max 12 directions. Any direction can contain max 53x2 Mbit/s.
1RU IDU Plus consists of LIM 32E1, Eq. Controller, RIM plug-in inserted into a wired shelf.
2RU IDU Plus consists of Eq. Controller, LIM 32E1 or Matrix with 32E1, or Matrix with STM1 and 16E1, one
Processor for two ODU.
The LIM interfaces the in/out tributaries and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit insertion (bit
extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator (from the demodulator). In
addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator.
Moreover the module duplicates the main sigbals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the receive
side in the 1+1 version.
The Matrix and the processor perform LIM Plus drop/insert of each 2 Mbit/s stream coming from max 4
directions and cross-connection of each 2 Mbit/s stream from 12 direction for a Nodal configuration.
The RIM contains:
the IF section of the 4QAM/16QAM programmable modemodulator or 32QAM in alternative;
the power supply unitthat processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and
send the battery voltage towards the ODU
the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting
cable.
The Controller performs the following:
interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, 2 Mbit/s (details are given
in the system technical specification)
contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment functio-
nality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU
interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports
receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.
5.4.3 ODU
The ODU unit contains circuits that permit to interface from one side the IDU and the antenna from the
other side.
The QAM modulated carrier is shifted to RF frequency bands through a double conversion.
Similarly it occurs at the receive side to send the IF converted carrier to the demodulator within the IDU.
The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AL and AS.
The ODU AS is also called Universal because it can be used as SDH ODU in Siae ALS (SIAE SDH link fam-
ily).
Antenna coupling is performed through a balanced or unbalanced hybrid system.
22
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
5.5 MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
AL different equipment can be locally and remotely controlled via a dedicated application software called
SCT/LCT running on PC.
It provides a friendly graphic interface complying with current standard use of keyboard, mouse, windows
and so on.
5.5.1 Hardware platform
The hardware platform used by SCT/LCT is based on personal computer having at least following charac-
teristics:
microprocessor Pentium 133 MHz
32 Mbyte RAM
windows compatible graphic monitor
floppy drive 1.44 Mb
HD with 50 Mbyte of free space
Windows 95/Windows NT/Windows 98/Windows 2000/Windows XP.
5.5.2 Management ports
The SCT/LCT program is connected to the equipment via the following communication ports:
Ethernet LAN, 10BaseT, 10Base2, AUI
Asynchronous RS232 serial line
USB port (1+0 version only)
Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into the radio frame.
Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into a 16 kbit/s or 4x16 kbit/s time slot of one of
the 2 Mbit/s tributary signals.
5.5.3 Protocols
SNMP along with IP or OSI protocol stacks are used to reach and manage the equipment operation.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
23
Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna
Fig.7 - 1+1 IDU typical configuration 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s
IDU - 1+1 - 2x2 - 4x2 - 8x2 - 16x2 Mb/s
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FAIL
1 UNITA'
-
+
+
-
RIM
RIM
1
2
2
1
RIM
RIM
Q3
USER IN/OUT
WAY
A
LCT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE 2
1
RX TX
REM TEST
ODU IDU
R
CONTROLLER MODULE
RIM2 MODULE
LIM MODULE RIM1 MODULE
24
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.8 - 1+1 equipment block diagram
M
a
i
n

t
r
a
f
f
i
c
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
M
a
i
n

t
r
a
f
f
i
c
S
C
T
/
L
C
T
I
D
U

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
O
D
U

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
A
l
a
r
m
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
M
u
x
L
I
M
B
I
D
S
P
M
O
D
D
S
P
D
E
M
D
S
P
D
E
M
B
E
D
E
M
U
X
M
A
I
N
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
O
D
U
2
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
F
M
O
D
I
F
D
E
M
B
A
T
T
.
4
8

V
C
A
B
L
E
I
N
T
E
R
F
.
R
I
M

2
R
I
M

1
C
A
B
L
E
I
N
T
E
R
F
.
B
A
T
T
.
O
D
U
1
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
F
M
O
D
I
F
D
E
M
4
8

V
C
A
B
L
E
I
N
T
E
R
F
.
1
C
A
B
L
E
I
N
T
E
R
F
.
2
T
x
1
R
x
1
T
x
2
R
x
2
S
W
C
O
N
T
R
.
S
W
C
O
N
T
R
.
O
D
U
2
O
D
U
1
C
A
B
L
E
C
A
B
L
E
I
D
U
4

d
B

o
r
1
.
5
/
7
.
5

d
B
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
25
Fig.9 - 1+0 non expandable equipment block diagram
M
a
i
n

t
r
a
f
f
i
c
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
M
a
i
n

t
r
a
f
f
i
c
S
C
T
/
L
C
T
I
D
U

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
O
D
U

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
A
l
a
r
m
I
D
U
M
u
x
L
I
M
B
I
D
S
P
M
O
D
D
S
P
D
E
M
B
E
D
E
M
U
X
M
A
I
N
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
C
A
B
L
E
I
N
T
E
R
F
.
B
A
T
T
.
O
D
U
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
I
F
M
O
D
I
F
D
E
M
4
8

V
C
A
B
L
E
I
N
T
E
R
F
.
T
x
1
R
x
1
S
W
C
O
N
T
R
.
O
D
U
C
A
B
L
E
26
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
6 EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
- Frequency range
- AL4 4.4 to 5 GHz
- AL7 7.11 to 7.7 GHz
- AL8 7.7 to 8.5 GHz
- AL11 10.7 to 11.7 GHz
- AL13 12.75 to 13.25 GHz
- AL15 14.4 to 15.35 GHz
- AL18 17.7 to 19.7 GHz
- AL23 21.2 to 23.6 GHz
- AL25 24.5 to 26.5 GHz
- AL28 27.5 to 29.5 GHz
- AL32 31.81 to 33.38 GHz
- AL38 37 to 39.5 GHz
- RF channel arrangement
- AL4 ITUR Rec F.3857
- AL7 ITUR Rec F.385
- AL8 ITUR Rec F.386
- AL11 no ITUR Rec for 11 GHz PDH
- AL13 ITUR Rec F.497
- AL15 ITUR Rec F.636
- AL18 ITUR Rec F.595
- AL23 ERC/T/R 1302 Annex A or ITUR Rec F.637
- AL25 ERC/T/R 1302 Annex B
- AL28 ERC/T/R 1302 Annex C
- AL32 ITU-R Rec. F.1520
- AL38 ITUR Rec F.749
- Goreturn frequency
- AL4 100 MHz
- AL7 245/196/168/161/154 MHz
- AL8 311.32 MHz
- AL11 530 MHz
- AL13 266 MHz
- AL15 420/728 MHz
- AL18 1010 MHz
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
27
- AL23 1008/1232 MHz
- AL25 1008 MHz
- AL28 1008 MHz
- AL32 812 MHz
- AL38 1260 MHz
- Transmission capacity
- Main signal from 2 to 32x2 Mbit/s see Tab.2
- Main signal nx2 Mbit/s plus
Ethernet transport see Tab.3
Tab.2 - Transmission capacity
Tab.3 - TDM plus Ethernet mixed transport structure
Configuration Max capacity
1+0/1+1 1U up to 16x2
1+0/1+1 2U up to 16x2
2+0 2U up to 32x2 in ring with D/I up to 16x2
1+0/1+1 1U 34/2x34
1+0/1+1 2U up to 32x2
Version Channel spacing (MHz) 2 Mbit/s available
Available Ethernet sig-
nal (Mbit/s)
2x2 Mbit/s 4QAM 3.5
2
1

2
4
4x2 Mbit/s 16QAM 3.5
4
2

4
8
4x2 Mbit/s 4QAM 7
4
2

2
8
8x2 Mbit/s 16QAM 7
4

8
16
8x2 Mbit/s 4QAM 14
4

8
16
16x2 Mbit/s 16QAM 14
4+1
1
24
32
16x2 Mbit/s 4QAM 28
4+1
1
24
32
32x2 Mbit/s 16QAM 28
4+1
1
56
64
100BaseT 32QAM 28 2 100
100BaseT 32QAM 28 4 95
28
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
- Service channel capacity
The following service channels and auxiliary capacity are made available for each configuration:
1+0 compact 2, 2x2, 4x2 Mbit/s compact version (1/2 standard unit) (obsolete)
1
- V28 interface 1x9600 baud data channel with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or RS232C 9600
baud data channel sync./async.
1+0/1+1 standard 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2, 34, 2x34 Mbit/s version (1 standard unit)
Available two service channels subdivided as follow:
- V28 interface 1x9600 baud data channel with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or RS232C 9600
baud data channel sync/async.
- 64 kbit/s V11 co/contradirectional interface
- 2 Mbit/s wayside for capacity equal or higher than 16x2 Mbit/s
1
1+0/1+1 high capcity 32x2 Mbit/s version (2 standard units)
Availbale four service channels subdivided as follow.
Two channels always available as standard:
- V28 interface 1x9600 baud data channel with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or RS232C 9600
baud data channel sync/async.
- 64 kbit/s V11 co/contradiectional interface
Two channels available as option:
- V28 interface 1x9600 baud data channel with digital party line or 2x4800 baud
2x4800 baud or RS232C 9600 baud data channel sync/async
- 64 kbit/s G.703 co/contradirectional interface
- 2 wire 300/3400 Hz analogue interface with DTMF calling facility
- 2/4 wire 3003400 Hz analogue interface with omnibus extension for EOW
- 2/4 wire 3003400 Hz analogue interface
- 2 Mbit/s wayside
1+0/1+1 100 Mbit/s Ethernet version (1 standard unit)
Available three service channel as follow:
- V.28 interface 1x9600 baud data channel with digital party line or 2x4800 baud o RS232 (9600
baud data channel synch/asynch
- 2 channels 2 Mbit/s wayside available on LIM front panel at tributary 3 and 4
- Antenna configuration 1+0/1+1 hot standby 1 antenna/1+1
frequency diversity, 1 cross polar antenna or two
separated antennas
- Frequency accuracy 5 ppm; 10 ppm ageing included
- RF spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390
- Modulation 4QAM/16QAM/32QAM as per Tab.4 and Tab.5
Tab.4 - Modulation used according to bit rate and RF channel space
1 Up to 8x2 Mbit/s, version wayside channel are not available.
Modulat.
type
Bit rate (Mbit/s)
2x2 4x2 8x2 16x2/34 32x2/2x34 100
4QAM 3.5 MHz 7 MHz 14 MHz 28 MHz n.a. n.a.
16QAM 1.75 MHz 3.5 MHz 7 MHz 14 MHz 28 MHz n.a.
32QAM n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. 28 MHz
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
29
Tab.5 - Modulation, capacity, channeling and size for IDU Plus
- Demodulation coherent
- Output power at the antenna side, 1+0 version refer to Tab.6
- Receiver threshold at the antenna side 1+0 version refer to Tab.7 (2x2, 4x2 Mbit/s) and Tab.8 (8x2,
16x2, 32x2, 100 Mbit/s)
- Additional losses both Tx and Rx sides, 1+1 version
- 4 dB 0.5 dB version with balanced hybrid
- 1.7 dB (branch1)/7 dB (branch 2) version with unbalanced hybrid
- Residual BER 1x1011
- Maximum input level for BER 10
3
20 dBm
Tab.6 - Nominal output power 1 dB tolerance - (1+0 version) ODU AL/ODU AS
Capacity Modulation Channeling Size
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
5x2 Mbit/s
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM
3,5 MHz 1RU
4x2 Mbit/s
5x2 Mbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s
10x2 Mbit/s
4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM
7 MHz 1RU
8x2 Mbit/s
10x2 Mbit/s
16x2 Mbit/s
20x2 Mbit/s
4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM
14 MHz 1RU
16x2 Mbit/s
20x2 Mbit/s
32x2 Mbit/s
4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
28 MHz 1RU
42x2 Mbit/s
53x2 Mbit/s
16QAM
32QAM
28 MHz 2RU
GHz
Output power
4QAM
Output power
16QAM
Output power
32QAM
4 +29/n.a. dBm +24/n.a. dBm +22/n.a. dBm
7 +27/30 dBm +22/26 dBm +20/n.a. dBm
8 +27/30 dBm +22/26 dBm +20/n.a. dBm
11 +25/29 dBm +20/25 dBm -
13 +25/29 dBm +20/25 dBm +20/n.a. dBm
15 +25/28 dBm +20/24 dBm +20/n.a. dBm
18 +20/24 dBm +15/20 dBm +15/20 dBm
23 +20/23 dBm +15/19 dBm +15/19 dBm
25 +20/23 dBm +15/19 dBm +15/19 dBm
28 +19/22 dBm +14/18 dBm +14/18 dBm
32 +17/20 dBm +13/16 dBm +13/16 dBm
38 +17/20 dBm +13/16 dBm +13/16 dBm
30
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Tab.7 - Threshold 2x2, 4x2 Mbit/s
Tab.8 - Threshold 8x2 ..... 100 Mbit/s
- Power supply
- Power supply voltage 40.8 to 57.6 Vdc
- Power consumption see Tab.9
Terminal fully equipped with 370 m 1/4 IDUODU cable.
GHz
4QAM 16QAM
2x2 4x2 2x2 4x2
10
6
10
3
10
6
10
3
10
6
10
3
10
6
10
3
4 92 94 89 91 n.a. n.a. 85 87
7 91 93 88 90 n.a. n.a. 84 86
8 91 93 88 90 n.a. n.a. 84 85
11 90.5 92.5 87.5 89.5 n.a. n.a. 83.5 85.5
13 90.5 92.5 87.5 89.5 n.a. n.a. 83.5 85.5
15 90.5 92.5 87.5 89.5 n.a. n.a. 83.5 85.5
18 90 92 87 89 n.a. n.a. 84 86
23 90 92 87 89 n.a. n.a. 83 85
25 89.5 91.5 86.5 88.5 n.a. n.a. 82.5 84.5
28 89 91 86 88 n.a. n.a. 82 84
32 -88 -90 -85 -88 n.a. n.a. -81 -83
38 88 90 85 88 n.a. n.a. 81 83
GHz
4QAM 16QAM 32QAM
8x2 16x2/34 32x2/2x34 8x2 16x2/34 32x2/2x34 100
10
6
10
3
10
6
10
3
10
6
10
3
10
6
10
3
10
6
10
3
10
6
10
3
10
6
10
3
4 86 88 83 85 n.a. n.a. 86 84 79 81 76 78 73 75
7 85 87 82 84 n.a. n.a. 81 83 78 80 75 77 72 74
8 85 87 82 84 n.a. n.a. 81 83 78 80 n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a.
11 84.5 86.5 81.5 83.5 n.a. n.a. 80.5 82.5 77.5 79.5 74.5 76.5 71.5 73.5
13 84.5 86.5 81.5 83.5 n.a. n.a. 80.5 82.5 77.5 79.5 74.5 76.5 71.5 73.5
15 84.5 86.5 81.5 83.5 n.a. n.a. 80.5 82.5 77.5 79.5 74.5 76.5 71.5 73.5
18 84 86 81 83 n.a. n.a. 80 82 77 79 74 76 71 73
23 84 86 81 83 n.a. n.a. 80 82 77 79 73 75 70 72
25 83.5 85.5 80.5 82.5 n.a. n.a. 79.5 81.5 76.5 78.5 72.5 74.5 69.5 71.5
28 83 85 80 82 n.a. n.a. 79 81 76 78 72 74 69 71
32 -82 -84 -80 -81 n.a. n.a. -78 -80 -75 -77 -72 -74 -69 -71
38 82 84 80 81 n.a. n.a. 78 80 75 77 71 73 68 70
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
31
Tab.9 - Power consumption
- IDU only consumption see Tab.10
Tab.10 - IDU consumption
- Guaranteed consumption for
power supply connector see Tab.11
Warning: As power supply circuit protection, on RIM board behind the front panel, a fuse F1 with following
characteristics is present:
- Nominal current 3A
- Nominal voltage 125 V dc
- Type timed
- Dimensions 6.10 mm x 2.59 mm
Tab.11 - Guaranteed consumption for power supply connector
- Environmental conditions
- Operational range for IDU 5 C to +45 C
- Operational range for ODU 33 C to +55 C
- Survival temperature range for IDU 10 C to +55 C
- Survival temperature range for ODU 40 C to +60 C
- Operational humidity for IDU 95% at +35 C
- Operational humidity for ODU weather proof according to IP65 environmental
class
- Heat dissipation of ODU Thermal resistance 0.5 C/W
Solar heat gain: not exceeding 5 C
- Wind load 260 Km/h
Configuration
Guaranteed pow-
er consumption
f15 GHz
40.8 a 57.6 Vdc
Nominal power
consumption
f15 GHz -48 Vdc
Guaranteed pow-
er consumption
f>15 GHz
40.8 a 57.6 Vdc
Nominal power
consumption
f>15 GHz -48 Vdc
1+0 with compact IDU 42 W 42 W 31/44 W 31/44 W
1+0 with standard IDU 50/52 W 42/44 W 39/52 W 31/44 W
1+1 with standard IDU 74/84 W 66/76 W 58/84 W 50/76 W
High capacity 1+0 54/56 W 46/48 W 43/56 W 35/48 W
High capacity 1+1 79/87 W 71/79 W 62/87 W 54/79 W
2x (1+0) 78/90 W 70/82 W 65/90 W 57/82 W
Configuration
Guaranteed
consumption
40.8 a 57.6 Vdc
Nominal
consumption
-48 Vdc
1+0 Standard Configuration 25 Watts 24 Watts
1+0 High Capacity Configuration 45 Watts 44 Watts
1+1 Standard Configuration 30 Watts 28 Watts
1+1 High Capacity Configuration 50 Watts 48 Watts
2+0 East/West Repeater Configuration 53 Watts 51 Watts
Configuration Imax per f 15 GHz Imax per f > 15 GHz
IDU standard 1,13 A 0,96 A
IDU high capacity 1,23 A 1,05 A
32
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
- Mechanical characteristics
- Dimensions refer to Tab.12
Tab.12 - IDU/ODU dimensions
- Weight refer to Tab.13
Tab.13 - IDU/ODU weight
- Mechanical layout refer to typical Fig.10 to Fig.24.
In following pages, most common IDUs are shown.
Fig.10 - 1+1 IDU standard configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors
Fig.11 - 1+1 IDU standard Ethernet tributary connectors
Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)
ODU AL 1+0 255 255 100
ODU AL 1+1 278 255 280
ODU AS 1+0 255 255 121
ODU AS 1+1 358 255 280
IDU 1+0/1+1 standard, up to 16x2, up to 2x34 Mb/s 480 45 260
IDU 1+0/1+1 32x2 Mbit/s 480 90 260
IDU 2+0 east/west repeater 480 90 260
IDU Plus 53E1 480 90 260
IDU Plus drop-insert 480 90 260
ODU AL 1+0 4.5 kg
ODU AL 1+1 13.3 kg
ODU AS 1+0 5.5 kg
ODU AS 1+1 15.3 kg
IDU 1+0/1+1 standard, up to 16x2, up to 2x34 Mbit/s 3.5/3.7 kg
IDU 1+0/1+1 32x2 Mbit/s 3.5/3.7 kg
IDU 2+0 east/west repeater 3.7 kg
Panning system 1+0/1+1 4.4 kg
IDU - 1+1 - 2x2 - 4x2 - 8x2 - 16x2 Mb/s
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FAIL
1 UNITA'
-
+
+
-
RIM
RIM
1
2
2
1
RIM
RIM
Q3
USER IN/OUT
WAY
A
LCT
RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE 2
1
RX TX
REMTEST
ODU IDU
R
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
TX RX
1
2 SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1
Q3
RS232 LCT
A
WAY
USER IN/OUT
D C B A
FAIL
10/100 BTX
1 2 3
ACT
LINK
DPLX
ACT
LINK
DPLX
ACT
LINK
DPLX
-
+
2
1
RIM
RIM
RIM
RIM
1
2
+
-
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
33
Fig.12 - 1+1 IDU standard D type tributary connectors
Fig.13 - 1+1 IDU (34, 2x34 Mbit/s)
Fig.14 - 1+1 IDU high capacity configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors
Fig.15 - 1+1 IDU high capacity configuration D type tributary connectors
Fig.16 - IDU Plus 1U - 32x2 Mbit/s
Fig.17 - IDU Plus 1+1 2U - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1 nodale 4+0
1 UNITA'
RIM
RIM
1
2
2
1
RIM
RIM
-
+
+
-
Trib: M-N-O-P Trib: I-J-K-L Trib: E-F-G-H
2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s
Trib: A-B-C-D
FAIL
R
IDUODU
TEST REM
TXRX
1
2 SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1
Q3
RS232 USER IN/OUT
A
WAY
LCT
2 1
FAIL
Q3
USER IN/OUT
WAY
A
LCT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE 2
1
RX TX
REM TEST
ODU IDU
R RIM
RIM
1
2
+
-
-
+
2
1
RIM
RIM
FAIL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FAIL
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
RIM
RIM
1
2
+
-
-
+
2
1
RIM
RIM
WAY A
USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE 2
1
RX TX
REM TEST
ODU IDU
R
Q3
+
LCT
RIM
RIM
1
2
+
-
-
+
2
1
RIM
RIM
2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s
FAIL
Trib: 13-14-15-16 Trib: 9-10-11-12 Trib: 1-2-3-4 Trib: 5-6-7-8
Trib: 29-30-31-32 Trib: 25-26-27-28 Trib: 21-22-23-24 Trib: 17-18-19-20
2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s
FAIL
Q3
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
TX RX
1
2 SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1 RS232 USER IN/OUT LCT
A
WAY
+-
- +
Q3/1
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1 RS232 USER IN/OUT LCT
A WAY
Q3/2
FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
Q3/1
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1 RS232 USER IN/OUT LCT
A
WAY
Q3/2
+-
- +
+-
- +
FAIL
FAIL
2 1
NBUS
2 1
FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
ON ON
STM1 2MHz
34
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.18 IDU Plus 1+1 2U (up to 53x2 Mbit/s)
Fig.19 - 1+0 ODU AL with separated antenna (pole mounting)
Fig.20 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna
FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
Q3/2
WAY
A
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE
REM TEST
ODU IDU
R
Q3/1
+-
- +
FAIL
Trib: 33-40 Trib: 41-48 Trib: 49-53
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
35
Fig.21 - 1+0 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting)
Fig.22 - 1+1 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting)
36
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.23 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna (wall mounting)
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
37
Fig.24 - ODU AS 1+1 with separated antenna
38
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
7 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT
7.1 GENERAL
The following IDU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from 5 C to +45 C.
7.2 TRIBUTARY INTERFACE
7.2.1 2 Mbit/s interface
Input side
- Bit rate 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm
- Line code HDB3
- Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
- Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm
- Return loss 12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz
18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz
- Max attenuation of the input cable 6 dB according to trend
- Accepted jitter see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823
- Transfer function see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742
- Connector type 1.0/2.3 or SUBD, 25 pins
Output side
- Bit rate 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm
- Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
- Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm
- Output jitter in accordance with G.742/G.823
- Pulse shape see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703
- Connector type 1.0/2.3 or SUBD, 25 pins
f
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
39
7.2.2 34 Mbit/s interface
Input side
- Bit rate 34368 kbit/s 20 ppm
- Line code HDB3
- Rated impedance 75 Ohm
- Rated level 1.0 Vp/75 Ohm
- Return loss 12 dB from 860 kHz to 17200 kHz
18 dB from 17200 kHz to 34368 kHz
14 dB from 34368 kHz to 51550 kHz
- Max attenuation of the input cable 12 dB at 17184 kHz according to trend
- Accepted jitter see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823
- Transfer function in accordance with G.823
- Connector type 1.0/2.3
Output side
- Bit rate 34368 kbit/s 20 ppm
- Rated impedance 75 Ohm
- Output jitter 0.3 U.I. from 0 Hz to 800 kHz
0.05 U.I. from 10 kHz to 800 kHz
- Rated level 1.0 Vp/75 Ohm
- Pulse shape see mask in Figure 17, CCITT Rec. G.703
- Connector type 1.0/2.3
7.2.3 Ethernet interface
- Ethernet characteristics according to IEEE 802.3
- Ethernet switch functionalities MAC switching
MAC learning
MAC Ageing
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1x Flow Control
IEEE 802.1p QoS
IPV4 ToS
7.3 STM-1 INTERFACE
The STM-1 interface can be specialized for different applications, by simply equipping the STM-1 interface
with the appropriate pluggable optical or electrical transceiver. Optical interface has LC connectors. Infor-
mation about the presence/absence and type of transceiver is transferred to the main controller. The char-
acteristics of all the possible optical interfaces are summarized in the Tab.14.
f
40
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Tab.14 - Optical interface characteristics
The LIM is provided with Automatic Laser Shutdown as prescribed by ITU-T G.664 Recommendation.
7.3.1 Characteristics of STM-1 electrical interface
Input side
- Bit rate 155520 kbit/s 4,6 ppm
- Line code CMI
- Rated impedance 75 ohm
- Rated level 1 Vpp 0,1 V
- Return loss 15 dB from 8 MHz to 240 MHz
- Max attenuation of the input cable 12,7 dB at 78 MHz ( law)
Output side
- Bit rate 155520 kbit/s 4,6 ppm
- Rated level 1 Vpp 0,1 V
- Pulse shape see mask of Figure 24 and 25 of ITU-T
Rec. G.703
Interface Ref.
Launched
power
(dBm)
Minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Operating
wavelength
Transceiver Fiber
Distance
(km)
L-1.2 G.957 0 ... -5 -34 1480-1580 Laser
Single-
Mode
Fino a 80
L-1.1 G.957 0 ... -5 -34 1263-1360 Laser
Single-
Mode
Fino a 40
S-1.1 G.957 -8 ... -15 -28 1263-1360 Laser
Single-
Mode
Fino a 15
I-1 ANSI -14 ... -20 -28 1263-1360 Led MultiMode Fino a 2
f
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
41
7.4 SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE
7.4.1 2 Mbit/s wayside interface
Input side
- Bit rate 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm
- Line code HDB3
- Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
- Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm
- Return loss 12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz
18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz
- Max attenuation of the input cable 6 dB according to trend
- Accepted jitter see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823
- Transfer function see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742
Output side
- Bit rate 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm
- Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm
- Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm
- Pulse shape see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703
- Output jitter in accordance with G.742/G.823
7.4.2 64 kbit/s codirectional interface
- Tolerance 100 ppm
- Coding synch + data + octet as per G.703
- Impedance 120 Ohm
- Max attenuation of the input cable 3 dB at 128 kHz
- User side see CCITT Rec. G.703
- Input/output level 1 Vp/120 Ohm 0.1 V
- Return loss see tables at par. 1.2.1.3 in CCITT Rec. G.703
7.4.3 64 kbit/s contradirectional interface V.11
- Tolerance 100 ppm
- Equipment side contradirectional
- Coding clock and data on independent wires
- Electrical interface see Rec. CCITT V.11
f
42
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
7.4.4 Analogue interface
- Electrical characteristics as per Recc. G.712
- Input level from 14 dBr to +1 dBr/600 Ohm
- Output level from 11 dBr to +4 dBr/600 Ohm
7.4.5 9600 bit/s low speed synchronous/asynchronous data
- Data interface RS232
- Electrical interface CCITT Rec. V.28
- Input speed 9600 baud
- Control wires DTR, DSR, DCD
7.4.6 9600 or 2x4800 bit/s low speed asynchronous data
- Electrical interface CCITT Rec. V.28
- Input speed 4800 or 9600 bit/s
- Electrical interface V.28
7.4.7 Alarm interface
User output
- Relay contacts normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)
- Open contacts Rmin 100 Mohm at 500 Vdc
- Closed contacts Rmax 0.5 Ohm
- Switching voltage Vmax 100 V
- Switching current Imax 1A
User input
- Equivalent circuit recognised as a closed contact 200 Ohm risist. (max) referred to ground
- Equivalent circuit recognised as an open contact 60 kOhm (min) referred to ground
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
43
7.4.8 Network Management Interface
RJ45 interface
- LAN type Ethernet Twisted Pair 802.3 10BaseT
- Connector RJ45
- Connection to LAN direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair
- Protocol TCP/IP or IPoverOSI
BNC interface
- LAN type Ethernet thinnet 802.3 10Base2
- Connector BNC
- Connection to LAN RG58 coax. cable 50 Ohm
- Protocol TCP/IP or IPoverOSI
RS232 interface
- Electrical interface V.28
- Asynchronous baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600
- Protocol PPP
LCT RS232 interface
- Electrical interface V.28
- Asynchronous baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600
- Protocol PPP
LCT USB interface
- Electrical interface USB 1.1 version
- Baud rate 1.5 Mbit/s
- Protocol PPP
44
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
7.5 MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR
- Carrier modulating frequency
- Tx side 330 MHz
- Rx side 140 MHz
- Type of modulation 4QAM/16QAM/32QAM
- Type of coding BCM
- Modulating signal from 2 Mbit/s to 105 Mbit/s depending on
different versions
- Spectrum shaping raised cosine (rolloff = 0.5)
- Equialization 5 taps
- Coding gain 2.5 dB at 10
6
1 dB at 10
3
7.6 CABLE INTERFACE
- Interconnection with the ODU unit single coaxial cable for both Tx and Rx
- Cable length up to 470 m. with 1/4 cable type for 4QAM
modulation
up to 370 m. with 1/4 cable type for 16/32QAM
modulation
- Rated impedance 50 Ohm
- Signal running along the cable
- Tx nominal frequency 330 MHz
- Rx nominal frequency 140 MHz
- Transceiver management signals 388 kbit/s bidirectional
- Carrier for transceiver management signals IDU to ODU = 17.5 MHz/0 dBm
ODU to IDU = 5.5 MHz/0 dBm
- Remote power supply direct from battery voltage
7.7 AVAILABLE LOOPS
The following loop are available within the IDU:
line tributary loop
internal tributary loop
baseband loop
IDU loop.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
45
8 DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT FOR 2, 8, 34
MBIT/S AND NX2 MBIT/S SIGNALS
Description that follows covers the following:
1+0/1+1 standard version
1+0 non expandable IDU.
8.1 1+0/1+1 STANDARD IDU VERSION
Description that follows is referring to LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM module the IDU consists of.
8.1.1 LIM
The LIM performs the following operations:
multiplexing process of the input tributaries
aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit
processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM mod-
ulator takes place within the RIM
duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated
version the changeover occurs at tributary level.
Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/
demodulator is produced by a chip set. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip
set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.
8.1.2 Circuit description
Tx side
Refer to Fig.25.
The 2/34 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The
multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries.
Attached figures show different multiplexing scheme as follows:
Fig.26 2/34 Mbit/s single tributary multiplexing . The mux performs stuffing operation and gen-
erates a proprietary frame to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
Fig.27 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and
generates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Oppo-
site operation occurs at the Rx side.
46
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.28 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a
8448 kbit/s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Op-
posite operation occurs at the Rx side.
Fig.29 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups
each of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion.
Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
Fig.30 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s
groups each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the
achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc.
G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion.The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process
before being sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
Fig.31 32x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. This version consisted of two LIMs (master and slave) each of
one manipolating two 16x2 Mbit/s signals. Each of one will generate a 34368 kbit/s frame structure
as per Recc. G.751.
The two signals are sent to the Bit Insertion within the master LIM for aggregation and stuffing proc-
ess. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I. Opposite oper-
ation occurs at the Rx side.
Fig.32 2x34 Mbit/s multiplexing. The two 34368 kbit/s tributaries are directly sent to the Bit In-
sertion for aggregation and stuffing process. Opposite situation occurs at the Rx side.
In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service
signals interfaced by Controller module.
The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation oc-
curring at the following bit rate depending on various versions implemented:
Tab.15 - Aggregate frame
The aggregate frame contains:
the main signal from the MUX(s)
the framed service signal from the service MUX
the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment
the frame alignment word
the bits dedicated to the FEC.
All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0
at 38.88 MHz
The LIM also includes the processing in digital form (see Fig.25) of the modulating signal to be sent to the
mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM.
The digital process includes:
serial to parallel conversion
differential encoding
generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.
Version Aggregate frame
2 Mbit/s 2430 kbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s 4860 kbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s 9720 kbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s 19440 kbit/s
16x2/34 Mbit/s 38880 kbit/s
32x2/2x34 Mbit/s 77760 kbit/s
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
47
Rx side
Refer to Fig.33.
From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following
processing:
clock recovery
frequency and phase carrier locking
baseband equalisation and filtering
bit polarity decision
differential decoding
parallel to serial convertion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.
The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error cor-
rector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:
BER extimate measurement
radio performances
HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken di-
rectly from CRC circuit before FEC correction.
The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a
logic circuit according with Tab.16.
The changeover is error free and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during
the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic syn-
chronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of 7 bits; additionally, the switching
unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to 7 bits. At
the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after
a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.
Tab.16 - Switching priority
Priority Levels Description
Highest
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Lowest
Priority 1 RIM PSU Alarm
Priority 2 Manual forcing (from main controller)
Priority 3 Cable Short Alarm
Priority 3 Cable Open Alarm
Priority 3 IF Unit Alarm
Priority 3 Demodulator Failure
Priority 3 Base Band Unit Failure Alarm
Priority 3 ODU Unit Failure
Priority 3 ODU PSU Alarm
Priority 3 VCO Failure Alarm
Priority 3 High BER >10
3
(or 10
4
or 10
5
, selectable by software)
Priority 4 Low BER > 10
6
(or 10
7
or 10
8
, selectable by software)
Priority 5
Early Warning BER > 10
9
(or 10
10
or 10
11
or 10
12
, select-
able by software)
Priority 6
RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from 40 to 99
dBm)
Priority 7 CRC Pulse
Priority 8 Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)
48
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
8.1.3 RIM
Refer to Fig.34.
The RIM consists of the following main circuits:
IF part of the QAM modulator
IF part of the QAM demodulator
power supply
telemetry IDU/ODU
8.1.3.1 QAM modulator
I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the fol-
lowing circuits:
recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity
two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process
330 MHz local oscillator
a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers
a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation
The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.
8.1.3.2 QAM demodulator
At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM de-
modulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.
8.1.3.3 Power supply
The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V.
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.
The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable.
An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
8.1.3.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU
The dialogue IDU/ODU is madeup by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Con-
trols for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carri-
ers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
49
8.1.4 CONTROLLER
The controller module performs the following:
interfaces the service signals
houses the equipment software for equipment management
interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports
receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.
Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.
8.1.4.1 Service signals
The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:
9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels
64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional
2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.
The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.
8.1.4.2 Equipment software
Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.35.
Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following:
Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.36 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:
- LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI
- USB port for 1+0 version
- RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection
- RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs
- EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs
- EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.
Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the users ID and relevant password.
Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.
Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
Ps for their attuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).
Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Lo-
cal logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.
50
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.
Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running pro-
gram (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new soft-
ware release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configu-
ration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
Peripheral controllers
The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of ac-
tivating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.
8.1.4.3 Supervision ports
The equipment managemnt is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.
The following are made available:
LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600
LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols
EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the su-
pervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.
8.2 IDU LOOPS
To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.37.
8.2.1 Tributary loop
Tributary local loop
Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.
Tributary remote loop
Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.
8.2.2 Baseband unit loop
This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
51
8.2.3 IDU loop
This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connect-
ed to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.
Fig.25 - LIM block diagram Tx side
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
M
U
X

2
/
2
x
2
/
4
x
2
8
x
2
/
1
6
x
2
3
2
x
2
/
2
x
3
4
s
e
e
F
i
g
.
2
3


t
h
r
o
u
g
h

F
i
g
.
2
9
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

c
h
a
n
n
e
l

m
o
d
u
l
e
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

m
o
d
u
l
e
B
I
:
-

m
a
i
n

t
r
a
f
f
i
c
-

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
-

E
O
C
-

F
E
C
-

F
A
W
F
r
a
m
e
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

M
O
D
-

S
/
P

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
i
o
n
-

d
i
f
f
.

e
n
c
o
d
i
n
g
-

m
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
n
g

s
i
g
n
a
l

g
e
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
X
0

3
8
.
8
8

M
H
z
D
/
A
D
/
A
t
o

R
I
M
2
t
o

R
I
M
1
I
&
Q
I
&
Q
s
y
n
c
h
r
.
2
/
3
4

M
b
i
t
/
s
G
.
7
0
3
n
x
2
...
n
x
3
4
2

M
b
i
t
/
s
w
a
y
s
i
d
e
s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
o
n
l
y

(
1
6
x
2
/
3
4

o
r

h
i
g
h
e
r

s
p
e
e
d
N
R
Z
C
K
N
R
Z
C
K
N
R
Z
C
K
-

F
S
K

m
o
d
/
d
e
m
o
d
-

3
8
8

f
r
a
m
e















g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
/
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
t
o
/
f
r
o
m

m
a
i
n

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
52
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.26 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing
Fig.27 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
Fig.28 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
MUX
proprietary
frame
B.I.
DEMUX
proprietary
frame
B.E.
Ck
Ck
Tx data
Rx data
2/34 Mbit/s
2/34 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
MUX
proprietary
frame
B.I.
DEMUX
proprietary
frame
B.E.
Ck
Ck
Tx data
Rx data
2x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
MUX 2 ->8
G.742
B.I.
DEMUX
2 ->8
G.742
B.E.
Ck
Ck
Framed data
8448 Tx
Framed data
8448 Rx
4x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
53
Fig.29 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
MUX 2 ->8
G.742
B.I.
DEMUX
8 -> 2
G.742
B.E.
Ck 8448 kHz Tx
4x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
MUX 2 ->8
G.742
Framed data
8448 Tx
4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 -> 2
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
Framed data
8448 Rx
Ck
Data
Data
Data
54
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.30 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
MUX
2 ->8
G.742
B.I.
4x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
MUX
2 ->8
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
8->34
G.751
Ck 8448 kHz Tx
Framed data
8448 kbit/s Tx
Framed data 34368
kbit/s
Ck 34368 kHz Tx
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742
B.E.
4x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
34->8
G.751
Ck 8448 kHz
Framed data
8448 kbit/s Tx
Framed data 34368
kbit/s
Ck 34368 kHz
Destuffing
2 Mbit/s wayside
Stuffing
2 Mbit/s wayside
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
55
Fig.31 - 32x2 multiplexing/demultiplexing
Fig.32 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2
Mux
Demux
8->34
34->8
BI/BE
8448 k
8448 k
8448 k
8448 k
34368 k
77600 kbit/s
LIM Master
Aggregate Ck
Mux
Demux
8->34
34->8
8448 k
8448 k
8448 k
8448 k
34368 k
LIM Slave
2

M
b
i
t
/
s

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
2

M
b
i
t
/
s

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
1 set of 16x2 Mbit/s
2 set of 16x2 Mbit/s
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2
Mux 2->8
Demux 8->2
BI/BE
77600 kbit/s
34368 k
34368 k
Aggregate Ck
56
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.33 - LIM block diagram Rx side
A
D
-

C
k

r
e
c
o
v
e
r
y
-

C
a
r
r
i
e
r

l
o
c
k
-

E
q
u
a
l
i
z
.

&

f
i
l
t
.
-

D
e
c
i
s
i
o
n

-

D
i
f
f
.

d
e
c
o
d
.

-

S
/
P
C
R
C

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
&

a
l
i
g
n
e
r
F
E
C
-

B
E
R

e
x
t
i
m
a
t
e
s
-

H
i
g
h

B
E
R
-

L
o
w

B
E
R
-

E
W
S
W

l
o
g
i
c
f
r
o
m

m
a
i
n

P
s
w
i
t
c
h

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
s
a
m
e

a
s

a
b
o
v
e
I
&
Q

f
r
o
m

R
I
M
1
I
&
Q

f
r
o
m

R
I
M
2
B
E
D
E
M
U
X
2
/
2
x
2
/
4
x
2
8
x
2
/
1
6
x
2
3
2
x
2
/
2
x
3
4
S
e
e
F
i
g
.
2
3


t
h
r
o
u
g
h
F
i
g
.

2
9

S
e
r
v
i
c
e
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
D
E
M
U
X
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

m
o
d
u
l
e
2
/
3
4

M
b
i
t
/
s
G
.
7
0
3
n
x
2
o
r

n
x
3
4

M
b
i
t
/
s
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
B
E
R

m
e
a
s
.
P
.
M
.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
57
Fig.34 - RIM block diagram
C
a
b
l
e

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
O
v
e
r
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
.
R
e
m
o
t
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y
5
.
5

M
H
z
Q
A
M
M
O
D
(
I
F

p
a
r
t
)
3
3
0

M
H
z
D
C
D
C
f
r
o
m

L
I
M
I
&
Q
b
a
t
t
e
r
y

-
4
8

V
I
/
V
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
S
t
e
p

d
o
w
n
+
3
.
6

V
-
5

V
C
a
b
l
e

e
q
u
a
l
i
z
.
D
E
M
Q
A
M
(
I
F

p
a
r
t
)
I
&
Q
t
o

L
I
M
1
7
.
5

M
H
z
f
r
o
m

L
I
M
t
o

L
I
M
58
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.35 - Main and peripheral controller connection
M
a
i
n

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
3
3
8

k
b
/
s
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
L
A
N
R
S
2
3
2
L
C
T
U
s
e
r

I
n
A
l
a
r
m
/
U
s
e
r

O
u
t
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
O
D
U
2
3
8
8

k
b
/
s
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
O
D
U
1
E
O
C
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
g
e
n
/
r
e
c
.
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
g
e
n
/
r
e
c
.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
59
Fig.36 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack
APPLICATION SOFTWARE
SNMP
TCP/UDP
IP
IPoverOSI
IS-IS
ISO 10589
PPP PPP
LLC
MAC
LAPD
Q921
LCC
MAC
RS232 EOC
Ethernet
LAN
EOC
Ethernet
LAN
Applic./present.
session layers
Transport
layer
Routing
layer
Data link
layer
Physical
layer
60
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.37 - IDU loopback
3
3
0

M
H
z
t
o

O
D
U
M
U
X
B
B

l
o
o
p
T
r
i
b
.

l
o
c
.

l
o
o
p
T
r
i
b
.

I
N
D
E
M
U
X
B
I
B
E
M
O
D
3
3
0
1
4
0
I
D
U

l
o
o
p
1
4
0

M
H
z
f
r
o
m

O
D
U
T
r
i
b
.

O
U
T
T
r
i
b
.

r
e
m
.

l
o
o
p
D
E
M
L
I
M
R
I
M
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
61
9 DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT IDU PLUS
FOR NX2MBIT/S STREAMS HIERARCHIC AND
NOT HIERARCHIC
9.1 GENERAL
The indoor unit IDU Plus is housed into a 1 Rack Unit (1RU) or 2 Rack Unit (2RU) and can have the following
configurations:
terminal
drop-insert
nodal.
Radio side stream has a PDH structure NxE1 but user interface can be NxE1 or SDH STM-1 partially filled.
Modulation and capacity are programmable. Other characteristics are:
hierarchic stransport up to 32E1
not hierarchic transport up to 53E1
tributaries: E1 (2 Mbit/s), STM1, Ethernet
managing up to 4 directions with drop-insert and cross-connection capability of 2 Mbit/s streams
combined IDU plus can create a nodal system to interface up to 12 radios (ODU)
path protection for E1 streams with drop-insert configuration
dynamic modulation with automatic switch from 16QAM to 4QAM and viceversa, based on BER and/
or on the RX signal power
internal PRBS generator and receiver on a E1 streams
local Tx switch managed by Rx alarms on remote equipment
modulation 4QAM, 16QAM, 32QAM
9.2 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 1RU
For 1RU composition see Fig.38:
1 LIM 32E1 or LIM STM1+16E1
2 equipment controller
3 RIM
4 cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration
Fig.38 - IDU + 1RU composition
1 3
2 4
62
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
9.3 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 2RU
For 2RU composition see Fig.39:
1 equipment controller
2 LIM 32E1 o LIM STM1+16E1
3 expansion 53E1
4 cover
5 RIM
6 cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration
7 cover or third RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration
8 cover or fourth RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration
Fig.39 - IDU + 2RU composition
9.4 1RU TERMINAL
With 1 Rack Unit it is possible to configure a 1+0 or 1+1 terminal and to manage up to 32E1 tributaries
with LIM32E1 or up to 53x2Mbit/s streams with LIM STM1+16E1 (16 are physical 2 Mbit/s other 37 are
built in STM1 stream). Capacity and configuration are listed in Tab.17.
Tab.17 - IDU Plus possible terminal configurations
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
Capacity Modulation Spectrum use Size
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
5x2 Mbit/s
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM
3,5 MHz 1RU
4x2 Mbit/s
5x2 Mbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s
10x2 Mbit/s
4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM
7 MHz 1RU
8x2 Mbit/s
10x2 Mbit/s
16x2 Mbit/s
20x2 Mbit/s
4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
16QAM
14 MHz 1RU
16x2 Mbit/s
20x2 Mbit/s
32x2 Mbit/s
4QAM
4QAM
16QAM
28 MHz 1RU
42x2 Mbit/s
53x2 Mbit/s
16QAM
32QAM
28 MHz 1RU or 2RU
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
63
9.5 2RU TERMINAL
With 2 unit IDU Plus it is possible to manage up to 53 tributaries E1 with the following configurations:
terminal 1+0
terminal 1+1
terminal 2x (1+0)
Capacity and configuration are listed in Tab.17.
9.6 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY INTERFACE
The 2 Mbit/s tributary interface is 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm. Both interfaces are present into the front panel
connectors the user can select the interface to use, preparing in the correct way the relevant cabling.
9.7 TERMINAL STM1+16E1 (1RU and 2RU)
A different LIM version provides 16x2 Mbit/s interfaces and one SDH STM1 port. STM1 port is protected by
two STM1 interfaces that can be available electrical or optical (different 2 plug-in modules).
STM1 is terminated and the contained E1 streams are sent to switch matrix built in the LIM, where E1
streams can be redirected towards radio link, towards 2 Mbit/s interface or remapped into STM-1. IDU Plus
is operating in MST mode and has a complete SETS synchronisation circuit with input and output synchro-
nisation signals.
Maximum capacity of LIM STM1+16E1 is:
53E1 for terminal 1+0
53E1 for terminal 1+1
79E1 for terminal 2x(1+0).
64
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.40 - IDU Plus 2RU drop/insert and nodal structure
9.8 DROP-INSERT (2RU)
For 2RU subrack composition see Fig.39:
1 equipment controller
2 processor 53E1
3 matrix 32E1 or matrix node STM1+16E1
4 processor 53E1
5 RIM
6 cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration
ODU1A ODU2A
RIM1A RIM2A
Processor A
LIM A
53E1 53E1
ODU1B ODU2B
RIM1B RIM2B
Processor B
LIM B
53E1 53E1
Back Plane
Matrix with
32E1 front panel
Matrix with
STM1 front panel
32E1
21E1
Exp
53E1
21E1
STM1 STM1
16E1
NBUS
NBUS
Two redundant
STM1 interfaces
or
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
65
7 cover or third RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration
8 cover or fourth RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration.
With drop-insert configuration (only into 2RU) it is possible to manage up to 4 directions radio (full capac-
ity) with the possibility to drop-insert freely the 2 Mbit/s streams arriving from the 4 directions and from
front panel according the capacity of the switch matrix (32E1 or STM1+16E1).
For example with 32E1 the maximum drop-insert possibilities is 32 tributaries but total capacity is limited
by total capacity of 4 directions. If total capacity of 4 directions is less then 32E1 that is the drop-insert
limit. The LIM STM1+16E1 has a minimum drop-insert capacity 63E1 streams built in the STM1 frame plus
16E1 interfaces for a total of 79 E1, each 2 Mbit/s tributary can be sent in any of 4 directions.
Maximum capacity arriving from the 4 radios is with 4 link at 53E1 for a total of 212 E1. For any configu-
ration the switch matrix is no blocking. A repeater can be done without activating local E1 ports.
9.9 NODAL (UP TO 3X2RU)
Composition of nodal is similar to drop-insert (see Fig.39):
1 equipment controller
2 processor 53E1
3 matrix 32E1 or matrix node STM1+16E1
4 processor 53E1
5 RIM
6 cover or RIM
7 cover or RIM
8 cover or RIM
A node can be made up of up to 3 subracks of 2RU so that we can have up to 12 maximum independent
directions.
On front panel of matrix STM1+16E1 there are two ports NBUS (1 and 2) which should be connected to
the other two 2RU racks as in Fig.41.
Fig.41 - Nodal connections
Subracks are connected with cables CAT7 quality (SIAE code F03471) to be inserted on front panel at NBUS
cable.
Each NBUS port is able to transfer 126 tributaries E1 (2xSTM1) from one rack to another with many pos-
sible cross-connections on all 12 directions of the node and front panel STM1+16E1.
2RU
2RU 2RU
NBUS1
NBUS1
NBUS1
NBUS2
NBUS2
NBUS2
66
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
9.10 LIM
The LIM performs the following operations:
multiplexing process of the input tributaries
aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit
processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM mod-
ulator takes place within the RIM
duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated
version the changeover occurs at tributary level.
Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/
demodulator is produced by a chip set. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip
set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.
9.11 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Tx side
Refer to Fig.42.
The 2 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The mul-
tiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries.
In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service
signals interfaced by Equipment Controller module.
The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation oc-
curring at the bit rate depending on various versions implemented.
The aggregate frame contains:
the main signal from the MUX(s)
the framed service signal from the service MUX
the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment
the frame alignment word
the bits dedicated to the FEC.
All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0
at 48 MHz
The LIM also includes the processing in digital form (see Fig.42) of the modulating signal to be sent to the
mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM.
The digital process includes:
serial to parallel conversion
differential encoding
generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.
Rx side
Refer to Fig.43.
From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following
processing:
clock recovery
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
67
frequency and phase carrier locking
baseband equalisation and filtering
bit polarity decision
differential decoding
parallel to serial convertion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.
The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error cor-
rector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:
BER extimate measurement
radio performances
HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken di-
rectly from CRC circuit before FEC correction.
The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a
logic circuit according with Tab.18.
The changeover is hitless and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during
the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic syn-
chronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of 7 bits; additionally, the switching
unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to 7 bits. At
the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after
a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.
Tab.18 - Switching priority
Priority Levels Description
Highest
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Lowest
Priority 1 RIM PSU Alarm
Priority 2 Manual forcing (from main controller)
Priority 3 Cable Short Alarm
Priority 3 Cable Open Alarm
Priority 3 IF Unit Alarm
Priority 3 Demodulator Failure
Priority 3 Base Band Unit Failure Alarm
Priority 3 ODU Unit Failure
Priority 3 ODU PSU Alarm
Priority 3 VCO Failure Alarm
Priority 3 High BER >10
3
(or 10
4
or 10
5
, selectable by software)
Priority 4 Low BER > 10
6
(or 10
7
or 10
8
, selectable by software)
Priority 5
Early Warning BER > 10
9
(or 10
10
or 10
11
or 10
12
, select-
able by software)
Priority 6
RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from 40 to 99
dBm)
Priority 7 CRC Pulse
Priority 8 Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)
68
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
9.12 RIM
Refer to Fig.44.
The RIM consists of the following main circuits:
IF part of the QAM modulator
IF part of the QAM demodulator
power supply
telemetry IDU/ODU
There are two types of RIM according to modulation capability:
4QAM/16QAM or
4QAM/16QAM/32QAM
Inside the RIM, behind the front panel, the is a fuse for protection to whole IDU. It is a soldering type fuse.
9.12.1 QAM modulator
I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4/16/32QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the fol-
lowing circuits:
recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity
two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process
330 MHz local oscillator
a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers
a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation
The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.
9.12.2 QAM demodulator
At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM de-
modulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.
9.12.3 Power supply
The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V.
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.
The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable.
An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
69
9.12.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU
The dialogue IDU/ODU is madeup by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Con-
trols for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carri-
ers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.
9.13 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER
The Equipment Controller module performs the following:
interfaces the service signals
houses the equipment software for equipment management
interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports
receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.
Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.
9.13.1 Service signals
The Equipment Controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:
9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels
64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional
2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.
The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.
9.13.2 Equipment software
Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.45.
Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following:
Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.46 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:
- LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI
- USB port for 1+0 version
- RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection
- RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs
70
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
- EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs
- EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.
Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the users ID and relevant password.
Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.
Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
Ps for their attuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).
Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Lo-
cal logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.
Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.
Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running pro-
gram (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new soft-
ware release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configu-
ration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
Peripheral controllers
The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of ac-
tivating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.
9.13.3 Supervision ports
The equipment managemnt is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.
The following are made available:
LCT USB interface port PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 230000
RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600
2xLAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols; two LAN interfaces are connected with a all-pass
switch
EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the su-
pervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.
9.14 IDU LOOPS
To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.47.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
71
9.14.1 Tributary loop
Tributary local loop
Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.
Tributary remote loop
Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.
9.14.2 Baseband unit loop
This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.
9.14.3 IDU loop
This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connect-
ed to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.
9.15 EXPANSION 53E1
This board can be used in a 2RU in position 3 together with LIM 32E1 to provide the interfaces necessary
to connect up to 53E1.
9.16 SERVICE CHANNEL ADAPTER
This board can be used in a 2RU in position 3 together with LIM 32E1.
This board gives the interface to service channels CH1 and CH2 plus 2 Mbit/s wayside channel. To be used
when there are no matrix and no expansion 53E1.
9.17 PROCESSOR 53E1
The 53E1 processor has the same functionnality of LIM but doesnt have the front panel connector because
all 53E1 are sent to Matrix.
72
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.42 - LIM block diagram - Tx side
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
M
U
X

2
x
2
/
4
x
2
8
x
2
/
1
6
x
2
3
2
x
2
/
5
x
2
1
0
x
2
/
2
1
x
2
4
2
x
2
/
5
3
x
2
M
b
i
t
/
s

S
e
r
v
i
c
e

c
h
a
n
n
e
l

m
o
d
u
l
e
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

m
o
d
u
l
e
B
I
:
-

m
a
i
n

t
r
a
f
f
i
c
-

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
-

E
O
C
-

F
E
C
-

F
A
W
F
r
a
m
e
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

M
O
D
-

S
/
P

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
i
o
n
-

d
i
f
f
.

e
n
c
o
d
i
n
g
-

m
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
n
g

s
i
g
n
a
l

g
e
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
X
0

4
8

M
H
z
D
/
A
D
/
A
t
o

R
I
M
2
t
o

R
I
M
1
I
&
Q
I
&
Q
s
y
n
c
h
r
.
2
/
3
4

M
b
i
t
/
s
G
.
7
0
3
n
x
2
...
n
x
3
4
2

M
b
i
t
/
s
w
a
y
s
i
d
e
s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
o
n
l
y

(
1
6
x
2

o
r

h
i
g
h
e
r

s
p
e
e
d
N
R
Z
C
K
N
R
Z
C
K
N
R
Z
C
K
-

F
S
K

m
o
d
/
d
e
m
o
d
-

3
8
8

f
r
a
m
e















g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
/
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
t
o
/
f
r
o
m

m
a
i
n

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
73
Fig.43 - LIM block diagram - Rx side
A
D
-

C
k

r
e
c
o
v
e
r
y
-

C
a
r
r
i
e
r

l
o
c
k
-

E
q
u
a
l
i
z
.

&

f
i
l
t
.
-

D
e
c
i
s
i
o
n

-

D
i
f
f
.

d
e
c
o
d
.

-

S
/
P
C
R
C

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
&

a
l
i
g
n
e
r
F
E
C
-

B
E
R

e
x
t
i
m
a
t
e
s
-

H
i
g
h

B
E
R
-

L
o
w

B
E
R
-

E
W
S
W

l
o
g
i
c
f
r
o
m

m
a
i
n

P
s
w
i
t
c
h

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
s
a
m
e

a
s

a
b
o
v
e
I
&
Q

f
r
o
m

R
I
M
1
I
&
Q

f
r
o
m

R
I
M
2
B
E
D
E
M
U
X
2
x
2
/
4
x
2
8
x
2
/
1
6
x
2
3
2
x
2
/
5
x
2
1
0
x
2
/
2
1
x
2
4
2
x
2
/
5
3
x
2
M
b
i
t
/
s

S
e
r
v
i
c
e
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
D
E
M
U
X
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

m
o
d
u
l
e
2

M
b
i
t
/
s
G
.
7
0
3
n
x
2

M
b
i
t
/
s
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
B
E
R

m
e
a
s
.
P
.
M
.
74
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.44 - RIM block diagram
C
a
b
l
e

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
O
v
e
r
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
.
R
e
m
o
t
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y
5
.
5

M
H
z
Q
A
M
M
O
D
(
I
F

p
a
r
t
)
3
3
0

M
H
z
D
C
D
C
f
r
o
m

L
I
M
I
&
Q
b
a
t
t
e
r
y

-
4
8

V
I
/
V
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
S
t
e
p

d
o
w
n
+
3
.
6

V
-
5

V
C
a
b
l
e

e
q
u
a
l
i
z
.
D
E
M
Q
A
M
(
I
F

p
a
r
t
)
I
&
Q
t
o

L
I
M
1
7
.
5

M
H
z
f
r
o
m

L
I
M
t
o

L
I
M
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
75
Fig.45 - Main and peripheral controller connection
Fig.46 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack
M
a
i
n

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
3
3
8

k
b
/
s
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
L
A
N
R
S
2
3
2
L
C
T
U
s
e
r

I
n
A
l
a
r
m
/
U
s
e
r

O
u
t
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
mO
D
U
2
3
8
8

k
b
/
s
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
O
D
U
1
E
O
C
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
g
e
n
/
r
e
c
.
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
g
e
n
/
r
e
c
.
U
S
B
APPLICATION SOFTWARE
SNMP
TCP/UDP
IP
IPoverOSI
IS-IS
ISO 10589
PPP PPP
LLC
MAC
LAPD
Q921
LCC
MAC
RS232 EOC
Ethernet
LAN
EOC
Ethernet
LAN
Applic./present.
session layers
Transport
layer
Routing
layer
Data link
layer
Physical
layer
76
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.47 - IDU loopback
3
3
0

M
H
z
t
o

O
D
U
M
U
X
B
B

l
o
o
p
T
r
i
b
.

l
o
c
.

l
o
o
p
T
r
i
b
.

I
N
D
E
M
U
X
B
I
B
E
M
O
D
3
3
0
1
4
0
I
D
U

l
o
o
p
1
4
0

M
H
z
f
r
o
m

O
D
U
T
r
i
b
.

O
U
T
T
r
i
b
.

r
e
m
.

l
o
o
p
D
E
M
L
I
M
R
I
M
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
77
10 DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT FOR
2 MBIT/S AND ETHERNET SIGNALS
Description that follows covers indoor unit with Ethernet ports. Paragraph 10.1.1 LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s for
2 Mbit/s signals deals with 2 Mbit/s.
Signal treatment and paragraph 10.1.3 LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s for Ethernet signals deals with Ethernet sig-
nal treatment.
In the place of LIM module it is possible to insert the LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s module. LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/
s contains all the circuits of LIM with 2 Mbit/s interfaces plus some specific circuits for Ethernet interface.
10.1 1+0/1+1 STANDARD IDU VERSION WITH ETHERNET INTER-
FACE
Description that follows is referring to LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM modules contained into IDU.
10.1.1 LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s for 2 Mbit/s signals
The LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s performs the following operations:
multiplexing process of the input tributaries
aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit
processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM mod-
ulator takes place within the RIM
duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated
version the changeover occurs at tributary level
concatenation of 2 Mbit/s streams
switching between a local LAN port and a remote LAN port.
Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/
demodulator is produced by a chip set. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip
set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.
10.1.2 Circuit description
Tx side
Refer to Fig.48.
The 2/34 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The
multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries.
Attached figures show different multiplexing scheme as follows:
78
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.49 2/34 Mbit/s single tributary multiplexing . The mux performs stuffing operation and gen-
erates a proprietary frame to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
Fig.50 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and
generates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Oppo-
site operation occurs at the Rx side.
Fig.51 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a
8448 kbit/s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Op-
posite operation occurs at the Rx side.
Fig.52 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups
each of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion.
Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
Fig.53 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s
groups each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the
achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc.
G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion.The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process
before being sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
32x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. This version consisted of two multiplexers of 16x2 Mbit/s signals. Each of
one will generate a 34368 kbit/s frame structure as per Recc. G.751.
The two signals are sent to the Bit Insertion within the LIM for aggregation and stuffing process.
The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I.
Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.
In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service
signals interfaced by Controller module.
The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation oc-
curring at the following bit rate depending on various versions implemented:
Tab.19 - Aggregate frame
The aggregate frame contains:
the main signal from the MUX(s)
the framed service signal from the service MUX
the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment
the frame alignment word
the bits dedicated to the FEC.
All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0
at 38.88 MHz
The LIM also includes the processing in digital form (see Fig.48) of the modulating signal to be sent to the
mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM.
The digital process includes:
serial to parallel conversion
differential encoding
generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.
Version Aggregate frame
2 Mbit/s 2430 kbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s 4860 kbit/s
4 Mbit/s 4860 kbit/s
8 Mbit/s 9720 kbit/s
16 Mbit/s 19440 kbit/s
32 Mbit/s 38880 kbit/s
64 Mbit/s 77760 kbit/s
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
79
Rx side
Refer to Fig.55.
From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following
processing:
clock recovery
frequency and phase carrier locking
baseband equalisation and filtering
bit polarity decision
differential decoding
parallel to serial convertion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.
The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error cor-
rector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:
BER extimate measurement
radio performances
HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken di-
rectly from CRC circuit before FEC correction.
The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a
logic circuit according with Tab.20.
The changeover is error free and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during
the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic syn-
chronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of 7 bits; additionally, the switching
unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to 7 bits. At
the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after
a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.
Tab.20 - Switching priority
Priority Levels Description
Highest
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Lowest
Priority 1 RIM PSU Alarm
Priority 2 Manual forcing (from main controller)
Priority 3 Cable Short Alarm
Priority 3 Cable Open Alarm
Priority 3 IF Unit Alarm
Priority 3 Demodulator Failure
Priority 3 Base Band Unit Failure Alarm
Priority 3 ODU Unit Failure
Priority 3 ODU PSU Alarm
Priority 3 VCO Failure Alarm
Priority 3 High BER >10
3
(or 10
4
or 10
5
, selectable by software)
Priority 4 Low BER > 10
6
(or 10
7
or 10
8
, selectable by software)
Priority 5
Early Warning BER > 10
9
(or 10
10
or 10
11
or 10
12
, select-
able by software)
Priority 6
RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from 40 to 99
dBm)
Priority 7 CRC Pulse
Priority 8 Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)
80
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
10.1.3 LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s for Ethernet signals
In the place of LIM module it is possible to insert the LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s Module. LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/
s contains all the circuits of LIM with 2 Mbit/s interfaces plus some specific circuits for Ethernet interface.
In the following Ethernet interface circuits are described.
For the description of all the other circuits relative to 2 Mbit/s interface and the structure of LIM please
refer to previous prargraph. LIM Ethernet is equipped with the following interfaces:
3x electrical interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseT IEEE 802.3
from 0 to 4x2 Mbit/s (E1) interface
total capacity from 2 to 64 Mbit/s
Most important functions of LIM Ethernet are:
multiplexing of 2 Mbit/s tributaries
concatenation of 2 Mbit/s streams
LAPS Link Access Procedure SDH (ITU X.86) for concatenated 2 Mbit/s
bridge/switch between a local LAN port and the radio LAN port
MAC switching
MAC address learning
MAC address ageing
Ethernet interface with autonegotiation 10/100, full duplex, half duplex
- Ethernet interface with Flow Control, Back Pressure, MDI/MDX crossover
network segmentation into bridge
virtual LAN as per IEEE 802.1q (anyone from 0 to 4095 VID for a maximum of 64 memory location)
(see Fig.61)
layer 2 QoS, priority management as per IEEE 802.1p (see Fig.61)
layer 3 ToS/DSCP (see Fig.64)
packet forwarding
A block diagram of LIM Ethernet module can be found into Fig.60.
Into LIM Ethernet there is a switch with 3 external ports and 1internal ports. External ports are electrical
Ethernet 10/100BaseT interfaces placed on the front panel. Internal port is connected to radio side stream.
Ethernet traffic coming from external ports goes to internal port radio side. The radio side port is connected
to one or two streams group of concatenated 2 Mbit/s. One stream for capacity up to 16x2 Mbit/s and two
streams for capacity of 12 16 2 Mbit/s streams, plus other 16x2 Mbit/s streams in case of maximum
capacity.
The concatenated 2 Mbit/s are assembled in a protocol called LAPS similar to HDLC.
In Tx side Ethernet traffic is packet into a protocol called LAPS similar to HDLC. The resulting stream is
divided into the used number of 2 Mbit/s streams. The 2 Mbit/s streams are then multiplexed, like into
standard LIM, together with 2 Mbit/s arriving from front panel, the resulting stream goes to the modulator,
see Fig.49, Fig.50, Fig.51, Fig.52, Fig.53 e Fig.60.
In Rx the stream arriving from the demodulator is divided into the 2 Mbit/s streams, like into standard LIM,
then the 2 Mbit/s not used into the front panel 2 Mbit/s are concatenated and sent to Ethernet circuits.
Resulting stream, after LAPS protocol control, is sent to switch internal port.
10.1.3.1 2 Mbit/s tributaries
LIM Ethernet module uses the 16x2 Mbit/s mode of AL radio link. Tributary channels at 2 Mbit/s (E1) are
connected to 8 coaxial connectors 1.0/2.3 into front panel. 2 Mbit/s streams are multiplexed as into stand-
ard LIM see Fig.49, Fig.50, Fig.51, Fig.52, Fig.53.
From 0 to 4 2 Mbit/s tributaries can be selected to be used via SCT/LCT program, all the other available 2
Mbit/s are sent to switch internal port.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
81
For 100 Mbit/s version can be selected up to 2 tributaries, position number 3 and 4 in tributary connectors
are available for wayside connection (2 Mbit/s each).
10.1.3.2 Electrical Ethernet interface
The electrical Ethernet/Fast Ethernet interfaces are type IEEE 802.3 10/100BaseT with RJ45 connector. For
input or output signals at RJ45 please refer to chapter 15 USER CONNECTIONS. Cable can be UTP (Un-
shielded Twisted Pair) or STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Category 5.
Standard coding:
Ethernet 10 Mbit/s: Manchester
Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s: MLT3 ternary
EMC/EMI protection:
input and output pins are galvanically isolated through a transformer
to reduce EMI every pin at RJ45 connector is terminated even if not used
two signal lines are equipped with low capacity secondary protection to sustain residuals of possible
electrostatic discharges (ESD).
With LCT/SCT program it is possible to activate autonegotiation (speed/duplex/flow control) on 10/
100BaseT interface.
10.1.3.3 Front panel LEDs
On FEM front panel there are a total of 6 Leds. There are 2 Leds for any Ethernet interface:
DUPLEX: color green, On = full duplex, OFF = half duplex
LINK/ACT: color green, ON = link up without activity, OFF = link down, BLINKING = link with activity
on Rx and Tx.
10.1.3.4 Bridge/switch function
A radio link AL equipped witha LIM/Ethernet module can operate like a bridge/switch between two or more
separated LANs with the following advantags:
to connect two separated LANs at a distance even greater than the maximum limits of 2.5 km (for
Ethernet)
to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network
to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than
traffic in a single LAN.
The bridge realized into LIM/Ethernet module is a transparent bridge (IEEE 802.1 part D) into the same
Vlan described by VLAN Configuration Table.
The bridge works at data link level, Layer 2 of OSI pile, and leave untouched Layer 3.
The bridge takes care to sendo traffic from a local LAN, to remote LAN.. Routing is only on the basic of
Level 2 addresses, sublevel MAC.
The operation of bridge is the following:
when a bridge interface receives a MAC frame, the bridge on the basis of destination address, de-
cides which LAN to send it
if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is descarded
if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into
local address table the frame is sent only on destintion LAN (MAC switching)
otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).
82
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
A bridge is very different from a repeater, which copies slavishly everything that receives from a line on
all the others. The bridge, in fact, acquires a frame, analyzes it, reconstruct it and routes it. The bridge
compensates also the different speeds of the interfaces, therefore an input can be at 100 Mbit/s and output
at 10 Mbit/s.
The mechanism is the following:
from the moment of its activation, the bridge examines all the frames that arrive it from different
LANs, and on these basis it builds its routing tables progressively.
In fact, every received frame allows the bridge to know on what LAN the sending station is located
(MAC address learning).
every frame that arrives to the bridge is rebroadcasted:
- if the bridge has the destination address into the routing table, sends the frame only into the
corresponding LAN
- otherwise the frame is sent to all the LANs except the originating (flooding)
- as soon as the bridge increases its knowledge of different machines, the retransmission becomes
more and more selective (and therefore more efficient)
the routing tables are updated every some minutes (programmable), removing addresses not alive
in the last period (so, if a machine is moved, within a few minute it is addressed correctly) (MAC
address ageing).
The whole process of bridging is restricted to the ports which are members of the same Vlan as described
into Vlan Configuration Table.
10.1.3.5 Ethernet Full Duplex function
The first realizations of the Ethernet network were on coaxial cable with the 10Base5 standard.
According to this standard Ethernet interfaces (e.g. PC) are connected to the coaxial cable in parallel and
are normally in receiving mode. Only one PC, at a certain time, transmits on the cable, the others are re-
ceiving, so this is half duplex mode, and only one PC uses the recived message.
Then the coaxial cable was progressively replaced by the pairs cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) as per
10BaseT standard. Normally there are four pairs into UTP Cat5 cable but two pairs are used with 10BaseT,
one for Tx one for Rx. Into 10Base5 and 10BaseT standards, network protocols are the same the difference
lays into the electrical interface. UTP cable is connected point to point betwen a hub and a Ethernet inter-
face. Network structure is a star where the server is connected to a hub and from this a UTP cable is laid
down for each Ethernet interface starts.
The further step is to replace the hub with a more powerful equipment, e.g. a switch. In this case it is
possible to activate transmission on both pairs at the same time, on one twisted pair for one direction, on
the other pair for opposite direction. Thus we obtain full duplex transmission on UTP.
Activating full duplex transmission it is possible to obtain a theoretical increase of performance of nearly
100%. Full duplex mode can be activated into 10/100BaseT interfaces manually or with autonegotiation
100BaseFx operates always into full duplex mode.
10.1.3.6 Link Loss Forwarding
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of ethernet interface.
LLF can be enabled or disabled. If LLF is enabled an US radio alarm condition will generate the alarm status
of Ethernet interface blocking any transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each 3 ports at front panel.
With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not
available and can temporarerly reroute the traffic.
10.1.3.7 MDI/MDIX crossover
The Ethernet electrical interface into FEM module can be defined by SCT program as MDI or MDIX to cross
over between pairs so that external crossover cable is not required.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
83
10.1.3.8 VLAN functionality
LIM Ethernet module works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag for VLANs and QoS see Fig.61.
The virtual LAN (VLAN) are logical separated subnets so that all the stations, into VLAN, seem to be into
the same physical LAN segment even if they are geographically separated.
The VLAN are used to separate traffic on the same physical LAN too. Station operating on the same physical
LAN but on different VLAN work in separated mode thus they do not share broadcast and multicast mes-
sages. This results in a reduction of broadcast generated traffic and above all we get more security thanks
to network separation.
Tag position and structure are shown into Fig.61.
Tag is made up with:
a fixed word of 2 bytes
3 bits for priority according 802.1p
1 fixed bit
12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according 802.1q.
Switch crossconnections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output
ports should be defined for any used VID.
Vlan Configuration Table has 64 position for Vlan ID range from 1 to 4095.
10.1.3.9 Switch organized by port
The switch can be organized on port basis treating both Tagged and Untagged packets in the same way.
For each input port it is possible to define where to route the incoming traffic; one or more of the 3 other
ports can be Enabled to exit the incoming traffic. It is possible, also, to route back the incoming traffic into
the same port. This type of connection are monodirectional. For a dibirectional connection between a ge-
neric Lan A and Lan B it is necessary to set the connection from Lan A to Lan B and from Lan B to Lan A.
LIM Ethernet has 3 physical ports and one internal port, radio side. The internal switch can connect two or
more ports together.
Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet. It is possible to select that a packet follows
the description of Vlan Configuration Table for its Vlan ID.
Another selection is to follow only Vlan Configuration Table.
Packets can exit from a port as Unmodified or all Tagged either all Untagged. Unteggad packets will take
default tags.
For output operations there are 3 selections:
unmodified: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged
tagged: all the packets will exit tagged, tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take De-
fault VID of incoming port.
untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.
10.1.3.10 Switch organized by VLAN ID
Vlan Configuration Table
Vlan Configuration Table defines a list of Vlan ID, For any Vlan ID some ports are members of Vlan others
are not members. Ports members of a Vlan are allowed to receive and send packets with that Vlan. Switch
dinamically assignes packets to the output port according their VLAN ID.
Packets arent sent out to that port unless they belong to one of the Vlan of which the port is a member.
A port can be a member of a Vlan or many Vlan.
84
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
A port can be a member from 1 to 64 Vlans but tagged packets are dropped if their input port is not a
member of packets Vlan.
After the control of packet and port Vlan membership MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this
packet.
Ingress Filtering Check
This is a process to check an incoming packet to compare its Valn ID to input ports Vlan membership. With
Ingress Filtering Check it is possible to permit only to tagged packets to enter the switch. If the port is not
member of the Vlan n. XX all the incoming packets with Vlan ID XX will be dropped.
There are 3 option into Ingress Filtering Check to manage incoming packets:
Disable: all Tagged and Untagged packets can transit into the switch following setting of swicth or-
ganized by port.
Fallback: Untagged frames follow the rules of switch organized by port, Tagged frames with Vlan
ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan
ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of switch organized by port.
Secure: Untagged frames cannot enter the switch, Tagged frames with Vlan ID described into the
Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan ID not described into
the Vlan Configuration Table cannot enter the switch.
Operations at the input. At the input port the packet is received and a switching decision must be made.
The switch analyse the Vlan ID (if present) and decides whether and where to forward the frame. If the
received packet is untagged, the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port Lan per
port settings. If the packet is tagged the switch check the other 3 destination ports to find at least one
with the same Vlan ID and put the packet into output port queue. If the Vlan ID is not listed into Vlan
Configuration Table the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port Lan per port set-
tings. Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet.
Operations at the output. For each output port there are 3 selections for outgoing packets.
Disable output port
Enable unchanged: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged.
Enable tagged: all the packets will exit tagged with Vlan ID specified into Vlan Configuration Table,
tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port.
Untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.
10.1.3.11 Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p
Some services as voice overIP and videoconference have some time limits to work properly. A solution is
to increase the priority of time sensitive packets. In this case random crowding coming from other services
affects the delay of prioritized packets a lot less.
Into LIM Ethernet module different priority of incoming packets is managed using Tag defined into IEEE
802.1p (see Fig.61).
Every switch output port holds 4 output queues: queue 4 has highest priority, queue 0 has the lowest pri-
ority (see Fig.62).
Priority can be organized by incoming port or by incoming priority tag:
Priority by incoming port. For Untagged packets at each input ports it is decided to send the packets
to one of the 4 queues of output ports defining which is the Default Priority Queue: Queue = 0, 1,
2, 3. For Tagged packets it is necessary to Disable Priority so they will go in the same queue of
Untagged packets.
Priority by incoming priority. For tagged packets for each priority tag (3 bits = for 7 priority levels)
it is possible to define where to send the packets, into Queue from 0 to 3. Priority must be enable
on 802.1p mode only or IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode and
IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode
and IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode and then 808.1q. For untagged packets the priority
is defined only by incoming port.
Outgoing packet policy at output ports can be WFQ (Wait Fair Queue) with fixed proportional output policy
8 packets from Queue 3, 4 from Queue 2, 4 from Queue 1, 1 from Queue 0.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
85
10.1.3.12 Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IPV4 ToS (DSCP)
Only for IP packets it is possible to use incoming Layer 3 ToS (see Fig.63) to prioritize incoming packets.
The 8 bits available can be read as 7 bits of ToS or 6 bits of DSCP as shown in Fig.64.
According priority defined into ToS/DSCP the packet is sent into high priority queue low priority queue of
output ports.
With SCT/LCT program it is possible to select a different output queue for any ToS/DSCP priority level at
each input port.
10.1.4 RIM
Refer to Fig.56.
The RIM consists of the following main circuits:
IF part of the QAM modulator
IF part of the QAM demodulator
power supply
telemetry IDU/ODU.
10.1.4.1 QAM modulator
I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the fol-
lowing circuits:
recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity
two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process
330 MHz local oscillator
a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers
a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation
The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.
10.1.4.2 QAM demodulator
At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM de-
modulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.
10.1.4.3 Power supply
The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V.
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.
The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An elec-
tronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
86
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
10.1.4.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU
The dialogue IDU/ODU is madeup by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Con-
trols for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carri-
ers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.
10.1.5 CONTROLLER
The controller module performs the following:
interfaces the service signals
houses the equipment software for equipment management
interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports
receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.
10.1.5.1 Service signals
The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:
9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels
64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional
2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.
The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.
For 100 Mbit/s version the following service channels are available:
9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels
2x2 Mbit/s wayside G.703 channels.
10.1.6 Equipment software
Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.57.
Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following:
Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.58 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:
- LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI
- USB port for 1+0 version
- RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection
- RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
87
- EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs
- EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.
Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the users ID and relevant password.
Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.
Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
Ps for their attuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).
Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Lo-
cal logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.
Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.
Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running pro-
gram (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new soft-
ware release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configu-
ration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
Peripheral controllers
The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of ac-
tivating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.
10.1.6.1 Supervision ports
The equipment managemnt is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.
The following are made available:
LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600
LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols
EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the su-
pervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.
10.2 IDU LOOPS
To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.59.
10.2.1 Tributary loop
Tributary local loop
Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.
88
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Tributary remote loop
Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.
10.2.2 Baseband unit loop
This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.
10.2.3 IDU loop
This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connect-
ed to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
89
Fig.48 - LIM block diagram Tx side
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
M
U
X

2
/
2
x
2
/
4
x
2
8
x
2
/
1
6
x
2
3
2
x
2
/
2
x
3
4
s
e
e
F
i
g
.
4
6


t
h
r
o
u
g
h
F
i
g
.
5
1

S
e
r
v
i
c
e

c
h
a
n
n
e
l

m
o
d
u
l
e
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

m
o
d
u
l
e
B
I
:
-

m
a
i
n

t
r
a
f
f
i
c
-

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
-

E
O
C
-

F
E
C
-

F
A
W
F
r
a
m
e
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

M
O
D
-

S
/
P

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
i
o
n
-

d
i
f
f
.

e
n
c
o
d
i
n
g
-

m
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
n
g

s
i
g
n
a
l

g
e
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
X
0

3
8
.
8
8

M
H
z
D
/
A
D
/
A
t
o

R
I
M
2
t
o

R
I
M
1
I
&
Q
I
&
Q
s
y
n
c
h
r
.
2
/
3
4

M
b
i
t
/
s
G
.
7
0
3
n
x
2
...
n
x
3
4
2

M
b
i
t
/
s
w
a
y
s
i
d
e
s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
o
n
l
y

(
1
6
x
2
/
3
4

o
r

h
i
g
h
e
r

s
p
e
e
d N
R
Z
C
K
N
R
Z
C
K
N
R
Z
C
K
-

F
S
K

m
o
d
/
d
e
m
o
d
-

3
8
8

f
r
a
m
e















g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
/
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
t
o
/
f
r
o
m

m
a
i
n

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
90
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.49 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing
Fig.50 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
Fig.51 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
MUX
proprietary
frame
B.I.
DEMUX
proprietary
frame
B.E.
Ck
Ck
Tx data
Rx data
2/34 Mbit/s
2/34 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
MUX
proprietary
frame
B.I.
DEMUX
proprietary
frame
B.E.
Ck
Ck
Tx data
Rx data
2x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
MUX 2 ->8
G.742
B.I.
DEMUX
2 ->8
G.742
B.E.
Ck
Ck
Framed data
8448 Tx
Framed data
8448 Rx
4x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
91
Fig.52 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
MUX 2 ->8
G.742
B.I.
DEMUX
8 -> 2
G.742
B.E.
Ck 8448 kHz Tx
4x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
MUX 2 ->8
G.742
Framed data
8448 Tx
4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 -> 2
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
Framed data
8448 Rx
Ck
Data
Data
Data
92
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.53 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing
Fig.54 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8
G.742
B.I.
4x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
MUX
2 ->8
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
8->34
G.751
Ck 8448 kHz Tx
Framed data
8448 kbit/s Tx
Framed data 34368
kbit/s
Ck 34368 kHz Tx
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742
B.E.
4x2 Mbit/s
Aggregate Ck
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
34->8
G.751
Ck 8448 kHz
Framed data
8448 kbit/s Tx
Framed data 34368
kbit/s
Ck 34368 kHz
Destuffing
2 Mbit/s wayside
Stuffing
2 Mbit/s wayside
BI/BE
77600 kbit/s
34368 k
34368 k
Aggregate Ck
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
93
Fig.55 - LIM block diagram Rx side
A
D
-

C
k

r
e
c
o
v
e
r
y
-

C
a
r
r
i
e
r

l
o
c
k
-

E
q
u
a
l
i
z
.

&

f
i
l
t
.
-

D
e
c
i
s
i
o
n

-

D
i
f
f
.

d
e
c
o
d
.

-

S
/
P
C
R
C

a
n
a
l
y
s
i
s
&

a
l
i
g
n
e
r
F
E
C
-

B
E
R

e
x
t
i
m
a
t
e
s
-

H
i
g
h

B
E
R
-

L
o
w

B
E
R
-

E
W
S
W

l
o
g
i
c
f
r
o
m

m
a
i
n

P
s
w
i
t
c
h

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
s
a
m
e

a
s

a
b
o
v
e
I
&
Q

f
r
o
m

R
I
M
1
I
&
Q

f
r
o
m

R
I
M
2
B
E
D
E
M
U
X
2
/
2
x
2
/
4
x
2
8
x
2
/
1
6
x
2
3
2
x
2
/
2
x
3
4
S
e
e
F
i
g
.
4
6

t
h
r
o
u
g
h
F
i
g
.
5
1

S
e
r
v
i
c
e
c
h
a
n
n
e
l
D
E
M
U
X
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
d
e

c
o
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

m
o
d
u
l
e
2
/
3
4

M
b
i
t
/
s
G
.
7
0
3
n
x
2
o
r

n
x
3
4

M
b
i
t
/
s
S
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
B
E
R

m
e
a
s
.
P
.
M
.
94
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.56 - RIM block diagram
C
a
b
l
e

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
O
v
e
r
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
.
R
e
m
o
t
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y
5
.
5

M
H
z
Q
A
M
M
O
D
(
I
F

p
a
r
t
)
3
3
0

M
H
z
D
C
D
C
f
r
o
m

L
I
M
I
&
Q
b
a
t
t
e
r
y

-
4
8

V
I
/
V
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
S
t
e
p

d
o
w
n
+
3
.
6

V
-
5

V
C
a
b
l
e

e
q
u
a
l
i
z
.
D
E
M
Q
A
M
(
I
F

p
a
r
t
)
I
&
Q
t
o

L
I
M
1
7
.
5

M
H
z
f
r
o
m

L
I
M
t
o

L
I
M
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
95
Fig.57 - Main and peripheral controller connection
Fig.58 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack
M
a
i
n

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
3
3
8

k
b
/
s
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
L
A
N
R
S
2
3
2
L
C
T
U
s
e
r

I
n
A
l
a
r
m
/
U
s
e
r

O
u
t
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
O
D
U
2
3
8
8

k
b
/
s
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
mO
D
U
1
E
O
C
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
g
e
n
/
r
e
c
.
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
g
e
n
/
r
e
c
.
APPLICATION SOFTWARE
SNMP
TCP/UDP
IP
IPoverOSI
IS-IS
ISO 10589
PPP PPP
LLC
MAC
LAPD
Q921
LCC
MAC
RS232 EOC
Ethernet
LAN
EOC
Ethernet
LAN
Applic./present.
session layers
Transport
layer
Routing
layer
Data link
layer
Physical
layer
96
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.59 - IDU loopback
3
3
0

M
H
z
t
o

O
D
U
M
U
X
B
B

l
o
o
p
T
r
i
b
.

l
o
c
.

l
o
o
p
T
r
i
b
.

I
N
D
E
M
U
X
B
I
B
E
M
O
D
3
3
0
1
4
0
I
D
U

l
o
o
p
1
4
0

M
H
z
f
r
o
m

O
D
U
T
r
i
b
.

O
U
T
T
r
i
b
.

r
e
m
.

l
o
o
p
D
E
M
L
I
M
R
I
M
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
97
Fig.60 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram
1
0
/
1
0
0
B
a
s
e
T
1
0
/
1
0
0
B
a
s
e
T
1
0
/
1
0
0
B
a
s
e
T
L
A
P
S
M
U
X

1
6
x
2

M
b
i
t
/
s
M
U
X

1
6
x
2

M
b
i
t
/
s
CONCATENATED 2 Mbit/s
P
D
H

r
a
d
i
o
PDH RADIO
10/100BaseT 2 Mbit/s
0
-
4
x
2

M
b
i
t
/
s
O
n
l
y

f
o
r

3
2
x
2

M
b
i
t
/
s

v
e
r
s
i
o
n
98
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.61 - Tag control into field
Fig.62 - Output queues
Fig.63 - ToS/DSCP tag position into IP packets
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, non-802.1p
Destination Source Type/Length
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p
Destination Source Tag Control Info Type/Length
8100 h
2-Bytes 3-Bits 1-Bit
12-Bits
Tagged frame type interpretation
3 bit priority
field 802.1p Canonical
12-bit 802.1q VLAN Identifier
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p
Type = 2 byte (8100)
Level 2 priority (802.1p) = 3 bit (value from 0 to 7)
Level 2 VLAN (802.1q) = 12 bit (value from 1 to 4095)
Canonical form = 1 bit (shows if MAC addresses of current frame are with canonical form:
- C = 0 canonical form (MAC with LSB at left) (always into Ethernet 802.3 frames)
- C = 1 canonocal form (MAC with MSB ay left) (token ring and some FDDI)
Queue 3
Queue 2
Queue 1
Queue 0
Output Port
Input port
Version TOS Total Length
Total Length Flags Fragment Offset
IHL
TTL Protocol ID Header Checksum
Source IP Address
Destination IP Address
Options Padding
Data
4 4 8 16
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
99
Fig.64 - ToS/DSCP
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MSB LSB
Not used
Not used
DSCP
ToS
100
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
11 DESCRIPTION OF THE INDOOR UNIT FOR E/W
REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT
11.1 GENERAL
Description that follows covers indoor unit for East/West repeater with Ring Protection.
Paragraph 11.2 COMPOSITION deals with unit composition because number and type of modules are dif-
ferent respect a standard IDU.
Paragraph 11.3 IDU CHARACTERISTICS deals with an explanation of unit block diagrams and with a de-
scription of functions performed by each module.
11.2 COMPOSITION
Indoor unit for East/West repeater with Drop/Insert functionalities is made up with the following modules:
- D1205202 Processor unit (2: East, West)
- D12089 Crossconnection matrix
- D12094 Controller
- D12037 RIM (2: East, West)
Fig.65 - IDU for E/W repeater
RIM
RIM
1
2
2
1
RIM
RIM
FAIL
FAIL
Q3
WAY
A
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE
RX TX
REMTEST
ODU IDU
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FAIL
D12052-02 D12089
D12037
D12094
East
West
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
101
11.3 IDU CHARACTERISTICS
11.3.1 Management of tributaries
A 2 Mbit/s tributary can be managed by cross connection matrix in different ways:
Ring Protection A tributary is inserted (transmitted) in radio aggregate frame towards both direc-
tion and can be dropped (received) from one direction or from the other depending on cross con-
nection and E1 switch criteria
Pass through IDU works as repeater, tributary coming from one direction is sent to the other
Loop E1 accessing the matrix from East side or West side can be looped back towards its origin.
11.3.2 Capacity
IDU max capacity depends on modulation used:
16QAM max capacity is 32x2 Mbit/s with maximum 16 tributaries with protected connections
(Drop/Insert). Lower capacity can be set.
4QAM max capacity is 16x2 Mbit/s and in this configuration all tributaries can be set in DropInsert
or in Pass through (in this last configuration the three sides of the matrix have the same capacity:
16x2 Mbit/s). Lower capacity can be set.
System can work with one branch capacity different than the other.
11.3.3 E1 switching criteria
In network configuration where thus East/West repeater IDU is employed as a Ring Protection, where a
direction protects the other on the opposite direction, the E1 drop can be managed through suitable E1
switching criteria:
1 Manual forcing
2 2 Mbit/s G.704 alarms (AIS, OOF, OOMF, BER6) where:
- AIS: presence of AIS
- OOF: out of E1 frame
- OOMF: out of E1 multiframe
- BER6: BER = 10
6
3 Preferential.
11.4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Description that follows is referring to MATRIX/PROCESSOR/CONTROLLER/RIM module the IDU consists of.
102
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
11.4.1 Matrix
Matrix module presents on front panel the 2 Mbit/s connectors and contains the sixteen relevant electrical
interface and the cross connection matrix.
The matrix allows connections of 2 Mbit/s streams with following capacities and directions:
east side 32x2 Mbit/s, subduvided from 1 to 16 one at a time and from 17 to 32 framed inside a
34368 kbit aggregate
west side 32x2 Mbit/s, subdivided from 1 to 16 one at a time and from 17 to 32 framed inside a
34368 kbit aggregate
towards front panel 16x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm.
Function performed by matrix module are the following:
code conversion of 2 Mbit/s streams in input and output (for Drop/Insert operations)
tributary transit between East and West
tributary transit towards one or both directions, in position not involved in tribitary transit
tributary drop from East or West or from one of them using appropriate switching criteria.
Tributaries cross connected by matrix are sent and received to/from East and/or West processor module,
depending on their direction and connection.
Hitless Rx switch between 2 Mbit/s streams, coming from East and West, can work with relative delay up
to 7 ms.
11.4.2 Processor
Operations performed by processor module depend on selected capacity and modulation.
Tx side
32x2 Mbit/s (available in 16QAM only) processor module receives from matrix 32 tributaries, the
first sixteen one by one and the second sixteen inside a 34368 kbit/s aggregate. The first sixteen
tributaries, in MUX block, are grouped in a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G751. In
this way two aggregates at 34368 kbit/s are sent to the Bit Insertion. The 2 Mbit/s wayside under-
goes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I.
After B.I. signal at 77760 kbit/s is sent to modulator.
16x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from Matrix 16 tributaries. The sixteen tributaries are
grouped in a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G751. In this way the aggregate at 34368
kbit/s is sent to the Bit Insertion. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent
to the B.I. After B.I. signal at 38880 kbit/s is sent to modulator.
8x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from matrix 8 tributaries. These are grouped in two 4x2
Mbit/s groups generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s and sent to the Bit Insertion. After
B.I. signal at 19440 kbit/s is sent to modulator.
4x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from matrix 4 tributaries. These are grouped in one 4x2
Mbit/s group generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s and sent to the Bit Insertion. After
B.I. signal at 9720 kbit/s is sent to modulator.
2x2 Mbit/s Processor module receives from matrix 2 tributaries. These are grouped in a proprie-
tary frame and sent to the Bit Insertion. After B.I. signal at 4860 kbit/s is sent to modulator.
An additional Service Mux/Demux is provided to aggregate various service signal interfaces by Controller
module. Achieved stream is sent to BI/BE to obtain the aggregate frame (various bit rate depending on
capacity set) for block MOD/DEMOD.
This aggregate frame contains:
main signal from MUX and from MATRIX
aggregate signal from service MUX
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
103
EOC signal for supervision towards remote equipments
Frame Alignment Word
Bits dedicated to FEC.
Processor also includes digital process of modulating signal to be sent to the mixer of QAM nodulator inside
RIM. The digital process includes:
serial to parallel conversion
differential encoding
generation of shaped modulating signal I and Q towards the RIM module.
Rx side
From connected RIM, Processor module receives I and Q analogue signals, converts them in digital form
and performs:
clock recovery
frequency and phase carrier locking
baseband equalisation and filtering
bit decision
differential decoding
parallel to serial convertion to recover aggregate signal.
Aggregate signal is sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and after to error corrector block
(FEC). Errors are properly counted to achieve:
BER extimate measurement
Radio performances.
HBER alarm is used to insert AIS in Rx signal.
Achieved signal is sent to Bit Ex circuit that, depending on capacity and modulation, performs in opposite
way the operations mentioned in Tx side.
104
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.66 - Block diagram of IDU with Cross Connection Matrix
D
/
A
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

M
O
D
/
D
E
M
O
D
-

S
/
P

c
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
-

D
i
f
f
e
r
.

E
n
c
o
d
e
/
D
e
c
o
d
e
-

M
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
/
D
e
m
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

w
i
t
h

C
R
C

a
n
d

F
E
C
-

F
S
K

m
o
d
-

3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
B
i
t

I
n
/
B
i
t

E
x
-

M
a
i
n

t
r
a
f
f
i
c

+

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
-

E
O
C
-

F
E
C
-

F
A
W
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
e

C
K
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X

1
6
x
2
D
/
A
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

M
O
D
/
D
E
M
O
D
-

S
/
P

c
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n
-

D
i
f
f
e
r
.

E
n
c
o
d
e
/
D
e
c
o
d
e
-

M
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
/
D
e
m
o
d
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

w
i
t
h

C
R
C

a
n
d

F
E
C
-

F
S
K

m
o
d
-

3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
B
i
t

I
n
/
B
i
t

E
x
-

M
a
i
n

t
r
a
f
f
i
c

+

s
e
r
v
i
c
e
s
-

E
O
C
-

F
E
C
-

F
A
W
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
e

C
K
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X

1
6
x
2
M
A
T
R
I
X
-

E
1

i
n

P
a
s
s

t
h
r
o
u
g
h
-

E
1

w
i
t
h

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n
t
o
/
f
r
o
m

R
I
M

E
A
S
T
Q
I
7
7
7
6
0

k
b
i
t
/
s
F
r
o
m

s
e
r
v
i
c
e

c
h
a
n
n
e
l

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
3
4
3
6
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
E
A
S
T
3
4
3
6
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
(
1
7
.
.
.
3
2
)
(
1
.
.
.
1
6
)

1
6
x
2

M
b
i
t
/
s
F
r
o
m

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
1
7
.
5

M
H
z
5
.
5

M
H
z
.
.
.
T
r
i
b
u
t
a
r
y

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
s
1
1
6
Q
I
F
r
o
m

s
e
r
v
i
c
e

c
h
a
n
n
e
l

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
1
7
.
5

M
H
z
5
.
5

M
H
z
F
r
o
m

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
7
7
7
6
0

k
b
i
t
/
s
3
4
3
6
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
W
E
S
T
3
4
3
6
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
t
o
/
f
r
o
m

R
I
M

W
E
S
T
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
105
11.4.3 RIM
Refer to Fig.67.
The RIM consists of the following main circuits:
IF part of the QAM modulator
IF part of the QAM demodulator
power supply
telemetry IDU/ODU
11.4.3.1 QAM modulator
I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the fol-
lowing circuits:
recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity
two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process
330 MHz local oscillator
a 90 phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers
a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation
The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.
11.4.3.2 QAM demodulator
At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM de-
modulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.
11.4.3.3 Power supply
The 48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for 5V.
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.
The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An elec-
tronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.
11.4.3.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU
The dialogue IDU/ODU is madeup by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Con-
trols for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carri-
ers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.
106
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
11.4.4 CONTROLLER
The controller module performs the following:
interfaces the service signals
houses the equipment software for equipment management
interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports
receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.
Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.
11.4.4.1 Service signals
The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:
9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels
64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional
2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.
The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.
11.4.4.2 Equipment software
Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.
The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.68.
Main controller
The activities executed by the main controller are the following:
Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.69 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:
- LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI
- USB asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection
- RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs
- EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs
- EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.
Login: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the users ID and relevant password.
Database (MIB): validation and storing in a nonvolatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.
Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
Ps for their attuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).
Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved Ps. Lo-
cal logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.
Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
107
Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running pro-
gram (active bank) and the standby program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new soft-
ware release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configu-
ration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.
Peripheral controllers
The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of ac-
tivating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.
11.4.4.3 Supervision ports
The equipment managemnt is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.
The following are made available:
LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600
LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols
EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the su-
pervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.
11.5 IDU LOOPS
To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.70.
11.5.1 Tributary loop
Tributary local loop
Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.
Tributary remote loop
Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.
11.5.2 Baseband unit loop
This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.
108
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
11.5.3 IDU loop
This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connect-
ed to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.
East side or West side tributary loop
Tributaries, accessing the matrix from East side or West side, not assigned nor in a Transit nor in a cross
connection, can be looped back towards their direction of origin.
Fig.67 - RIM block diagram
C
a
b
l
e

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
O
v
e
r
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
.
R
e
m
o
t
e

p
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y
5
.
5

M
H
z
Q
A
M
M
O
D
(
I
F

p
a
r
t
)
3
3
0

M
H
z
D
C
D
C
f
r
o
m

L
I
M
I
&
Q
b
a
t
t
e
r
y

-
4
8

V
I
/
V
p
r
o
t
e
c
t
S
t
e
p

d
o
w
n
+
3
.
6

V
-
5

V
C
a
b
l
e

e
q
u
a
l
i
z
.
D
E
M
Q
A
M
(
I
F

p
a
r
t
)
I
&
Q
t
o

L
I
M
1
7
.
5

M
H
z
f
r
o
m

L
I
M
t
o

L
I
M
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
109
Fig.68 - Main and peripheral controller connection
M
a
i
n

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
3
3
8

k
b
/
s
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
L
A
N
R
S
2
3
2
L
C
T
U
s
e
r

I
n
A
l
a
r
m
/
U
s
e
r

O
u
t
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
O
D
U
2
3
8
8

k
b
/
s
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
m
F
S
K
m
o
d
e
mO
D
U
1
E
O
C
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
r
e
c
e
i
v
e
r
g
e
n
/
r
e
c
.
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
P
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
a
l
c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
g
e
n
/
r
e
c
.
110
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.69 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack
APPLICATION SOFTWARE
SNMP
TCP/UDP
IP
IPoverOSI
IS-IS
ISO 10589
PPP PPP
LLC
MAC
LAPD
Q921
LCC
MAC
RS232 EOC
Ethernet
LAN
EOC
Ethernet
LAN
Applic./present.
session layers
Transport
layer
Routing
layer
Data link
layer
Physical
layer
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
111
Fig.70 - IDU E/W loops
MATRIX
32
.
.
.
.
.
1
1 16
BI/BE
MOD/
DEM
P
R
O
C
E
S
S
O
R
R
I
M
East side
Remote loop
Local loop
Remote loop
Local loop
..........
EAST ODU
West side
IDU
loop
Baseband
loop
Tributary
E
a
s
t

s
i
d
e

t
r
i
b
.

l
o
o
p
s
112
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
12 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT
12.1 GENERAL
The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AL and AS.
AS ODU is also called Universal ODU because it can work with ALS equipment (SDH).
The following ODU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from 33 C to +55 C.
12.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
- Output power at the antenna side see Tab.21
- Transceiver tuning range
- AL4 45.5 MHz
- AL7 42 MHz (154 MHz duplex spacing)
56 MHz (161/168/196 MHz duplex spacing)
94 MHz (245 MHz duplex spacing)
- AL13 84 MHz
- AL15 112 MHz (420 MHz duplex spacing)
120 MHz (728 MHz duplex spacing)
- AL18 330 MHz
- AL23 336 MHz
- AL25/AL28 448 MHz
- AL32 252/280 MHz
- AL38 560 MHz
- RF frequency agility 125 kHz step
- Duplex spacing
- AL4 100 MHz
- AL7 154/161/168/196/245 MHz
- AL8 311,32 MHz
- AL11 530 MHz
- AL13 266 MHz
- AL15 420/490/728 MHz
- AL18 1010 MHz
- AL23 1008/1232 MHz
- AL25 1008 MHz
- AL28 1008 MHz
- AL32 812 MHz
- AL38 1260 MHz
- ATPC dynamic range 40 dB
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
113
- Transmit power attenuation range 40 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable
- Transmitter shutdown 40 dB
- Antenna side flange
- AL4 N female connector
- AL7/8 UBR84 (with separated antenna) or PBR84 (with
integrated antenna)
- AL11 UBR100
- AL13 UDR120 or PDR120 with 90 rigid elbow
- AL15 UDR140 or PDR140 with 90 rigid elbow
- AL18/23/25 UBR220 or PBR220 with 90 rigid elbow
- AL28/32/38 UBR320 or PBR320 with 90 rigid elbow
- AGC dynamic range from 20 dBm to threshold corresponding
to BER10
3
- Accuracy of Rx level indication (PC reading) 3 dB in the range 40 dBm to 75 dBm
4 dB in the range 30 dBm to 40 dBm
- Maximum input level for BER 10
3
20 dBm
- Type of connector at the cable interface side N
- Signals at the cable interface
- QAM modulated carrier 330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
- Telemetry 388 kbit/s
- Telemetry carriers 17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
- Available loops RF loop
Tab.21 - Nominal output power 1 dB tolerance (1+0 version) AL ODU/AS ODU
Note
In 1+1 hot standby version the output power decreases by the following values:
4 dB 0.5 dB (balanced hybrid)
1.7/7 dB 0.3 dB (unbalanced hybrid)
GHz
Output power
4QAM
Output power
16QAM
Output power
32QAM
4 +29/n.a. dBm +24/n.a. dBm +22/n.a. dBm
7 +27/30 dBm +22/26 dBm +20/n.a. dBm
8 +27/30 dBm +22/26 dBm +20/n.a. dBm
11 +25/29 dBm +20/25 dBm -
13 +25/29 dBm +20/25 dBm +20/n.a. dBm
15 +25/28 dBm +20/24 dBm +20/n.a. dBm
18 +20/24 dBm +15/20 dBm +15/20 dBm
23 +20/23 dBm +15/19 dBm +15/19 dBm
25 +20/23 dBm +15/19 dBm +15/19 dBm
28 +19/22 dBm +14/18 dBm +14/18 dBm
32 +17/20 dBm +13/16 dBm +13/16 dBm
38 +17/20 dBm +13/16 dBm +13/16 dBm
114
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
13 OUTDOOR UNIT DESCRIPTION
13.1 GENERAL
The 1+0 ODU (refer to Fig.71 or to Fig.73) consists of a two shell alluminium mechanical structure, one
shell housing all the ODU circuits, the other forming the covering plate.
On the ODU are accessible:
the N type connector for cable interfacing IDU and ODU
the BNC connector for connection to a multimeter with the pourpose to measure the received field
strenght
a ground bolt.
The 1+1 hot standby version (refer to Fig.72) consist of two 1+0 ODUs mechanically secured to a struc-
ture housing the hybrid for the antenna connection.
ODU exists in two different versions, AL and AS. They differs about dimensions and output power.
AS ODU is also called Universal because it can work with ALS equipment (SDH).
13.2 TRANSMIT SECTION
Refer to block diagram shown in Fig.74.
The 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier from the cable interface (see chapter 13.4 CABLE INTERFACE) is for-
warded to a mixer passing through a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation up to 40 dB at 330 MHz.
The mixer and the following bandpass filter give rise to a second IF Tx carrier the frequency of which de-
pends on the go/return frequency value. The mixer is of SHP type.
The IF Tx frequency is P controlled. Same happens to Rx IF and RF local oscillators. This latter is common
to both Tx and Rx sides.
The IF carrier is converted to RF and then amplified making use of a MMIC circuit. The convertion mixer is
SSB type with side band selection.
The power at the MMIC output can be manually attenuated by 40 dB, 1 dB step .
Total attenuation is 40 dB including the 20 dB attenuator that follows.
The automatic adjustment is performed making use of an ATPC (see paragraph 13.5 ATPC OPERATION for
details). The regulated output power is kept constant against amplifier stage gain variation by a feedback
including the AGC.
Before reaching the antenna side the RF signal at the output of MMIC passes through the following circuits:
a decoupler plus detector diode to measure the output power
a circulator to protect the amplifier stages against possible circuit mismatch.
a ON/OFF switch for 1+1 operation
an RF bandpass filter for antenna coupling.
An RF coupler plus a detector and a shift oscillator made up the RF loop which is enabled upon receiving a
P control. The RF loop permits the Tx power to return back to receive side thus controlling the total local
radio terminal performance.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
115
13.3 RECEIVE SECTION
The RF signal from the Rx bandpass filter is sent to a low noise amplifier that improves the receiver sen-
sitivity. The following downconverter translates the RF frequency to approximately 765 MHz. The conver-
tion mixer is SSB type. The sideband selection is given through a P control.
A second down converter generates the 140 MHz IF carrier to be sent to the demodulator within the IDU.
The level of the IF carrier is kept constant to 5 dBm thank to the IF amplifier stages, AGC controlled,
distributed in the IF chain. In addition the AGC gives a measure of the receive RF level.
Between two amplifiers a bandpass filter assures the required selectivity to the receiver. The filter is SAW
type and the bandwidth depends on the transmitted capacity.
13.4 CABLE INTERFACE
The cable interface permits to interface the cable interconnecting IDU to ODU and viceversa.
It receives/transmits the following signals:
330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)
remote power supply.
The 17.5 MHz and 5.5 MHz FSK modulated carriers, carry the telemetry channel. This latter consists of two
388 kbit/s streams one from IDU to ODU with the information to manage the ODU (RF power, RF frequen-
cy, capacity, etc...) while the other, from ODU to IDU, sends back to IDU measurements and alarms of the
ODU. The ODU management is made by a P.
13.5 ATPC OPERATION
The ATPC regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter depending on the value of the RF level at
the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local terminal as threshold high and low. The
difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher than 3 dB.
As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low (see Fig.77) due to the increase of the
hop attenuation, a microP at the received side of the remote terminal sends back to the local terminal a
control to increase the transmitted power. The maximum ATPC range is 40 dB.
If the hop attenuation decreases and the threshold high is crossed then the control sent by the microP
causes the output power to decrease.
13.6 1+1 Tx SYSTEM
The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a balanced or unbalanced hybrid.
1+1 Tx switching occurs in the 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna or 2 antennas versions as shown in Fig.75 and
Fig.76.
116
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
The transmitter switchover is electromechanic type and consists of two ON/OFF switches within the two
ODUs that assure at least 40 dB insulation on the standby transmitter.
Transmit alarm priority is shown in Tab.22.
Tab.22 - Transmit alarm priority
13.7 POWER SUPPLY
The battery voltage is dropped from the cable interface and then sent to a DC/DC converter to generate
three stabilized output voltages to be distributed to the ODU circuitry:
+3.5 V
a voltage comprised between +6.2 V and +8.2 V to power MMIC amplifiers operating at different
frequency bands
a 12 V through an inverter circuit.
Each voltage is protected against overcurrent with automatic restart.
Protection against overvoltage occurs as soon as the output voltage raises more than 15% respect to the
nominal voltage. The restart is automatic.
Priority Levels Definition
Highest
Priority 1 RIM PSU Alarm
Priority 2 Manual forcing
Priority 3 Cable Short Alarm
Priority 3 Cable Open Alarm
Priority 3 Modulator Failure
Priority 3 ODU Unit Failure Alarm
Priority 3 VCO Failure Alarm
Priority 3 IF Unit Alarm
Priority 3 ODU PSU Alarm
Priority 3 Tx Power Low Alarm
Priority 4
Request from remote terminal (both re-
ceivers alarmed)
Lowest Priority 5 Revertive Tx (branch one preferential)
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
117
Fig.71 - 1+0 AL ODU
Fig.72 - 1+1 AL ODU
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
118
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.73 - 1+0 AS or Universal ODU version
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
119
Fig.74 - ODU block diagram (both versions)
C
a
b
l
e
i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
C
a
b
l
e
e
q
u
a
l
i
z
.
D
C
D
C
S
t
e
p

u
p
T
L
N
A
M
M
I
C
v
a
r
i
a
b
l
e

b
w

(
c
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

d
e
p
e
n
d
i
n
g
)
A
G
C
N

t
y
p
e
3
3
0

M
H
z
-
4
8

V
x
P
R
x

m
e
a
s
1
4
0

M
H
z
1
4
0

M
H
z
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
7
6
5

M
H
z
+
3
.
5

V
+
6
.
2

t
o

8
.
2

V
-
1
2

V
A
G
C
x
P
T
x

a
t
t
.

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

0

t
o

4
0

d
B
I
F

L
O

u
n
i
t
M
O
D

5
.
5

M
H
z
R
E
C

1
7
.
5

M
H
z
D
E
M

1
7
.
5

M
H
z
M
U
X

D
E
M
U
X
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
A
l
a
r
m
m
a
n
a
g

&

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
A
l
m
c
o
m
m
l
o
o
p
s
5
.
5

M
H
z
1
7
.
5

M
H
z
3
8
8

k
b
i
t
/
s
I
F

T
x
a
n
t
e
n
n
a

s
i
d
e
I
N
V
B
N
C
P
R
x

m
e
a
s
.
c
t
r
l

R
F

L
O

u
n
i
t
R
x
T
x
R
F

l
o
o
p
c
t
r
l
c
t
r
l
c
t
r
l
R
x
T
x
120
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.75 - 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna
Fig.76 - 1+1 hot standby 2 antennas
Antenna
side
SW control
Tx side
Rx side
SW control
Tx side
Rx side
First
antenna
SW control
Tx side
Rx side
SW control
Tx side
Rx side
Second
antenna
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
121
Fig.77 - ATPC operation
Thresh High
Thresh Low
Hop attenuation (dB)
40 dB
ATPC range
PTx max.
PTx min.
Remote PRx
dBm
Local PTx
dBm
Hop attenuation (dB)
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx
PTx actuation
Local Remote
PRx recording
Transmission
of PTx control
P
P
level
PTx control
122
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
123
Section 3.
INSTALLATION
14 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSUR-
ING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
14.1 GENERAL
The equipment consists of IDU and ODU(s) units and is mechanically made up of a wired 19 subrack (IDU)
and a weather proof metallic container (ODU). The two units are shipped together in an appropriate card-
board boxe.
After unpacking, mechanical installation takes place followed by electrical connections as described in the
following paragraphs.
14.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
14.2.1 IDU installation
On their sides the subracks making up the several IDU versions are provided with two holes for the M6
screws fastening the subracks to a rack or to a 19 mechanical structure. The front of the IDU mechanical
structure is provided with the holes at the sides. This permits to fasten the subrack to a 19 rack by means
of 4 M6 screws.
To avoid overtemperature problems two IDUs maximum must be packed up. Leave 1/2 unit (22 mm) space
between two IDU pack if more than two IDUs are required to be mounted.
124
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
14.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING
The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.
The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.
Position and pinout of the equipment connectors are available in this section.
Tab.23 shows the characteristics of the cables to be used and the flying connector types.
Tab.23 - Characteristics of the cables
Interconnecting points
Type of connector terminating
the cable
Type of cable/conductor
Battery
Polarised SUBD 3W3 female con-
nector
Section of each wire 2.5
sq.mm
a
a. For power cable lenght longer than 20 m. a section of 4 mm is required.
Tributary signals 1.0/2.3 male connector
75 ohm coaxial cable with
double shield diameter 4.5
mm dielectric in expanded
polyethylene type 2YCC
0.4/2.5 or equivalent
Alternatively to the above
option, 75 ohm coaxial ca-
ble with double shield, di-
ameter 3.1 mm dielectric in
Teflon type RG179 B/U DS
or equivalent
Tributary signals 25 pin SUBD male connector
120 Ohm balanced four
symmetric pairs with shield
75 Ohm unbalanced four
coaxial cable pairs with the
shield connect to ground
pin (see 15 USER CON-
NECTIONS document for
pin details)
Tributary signals
SCSI 50 pin male connector
(IDU Plus)
8 conductor cable different
for 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm
signals
User input/alarm output
Female type D connector with 9
pins and shielded holder
9 conductor cable with
double brass sheath type
interconductor DB28.25 or
equivalent
LCT/RS232
Female type D connector with 9
pins and shielded holder
9 conductor cable with
double brass sheath type
interconductor DB 28.10 or
equivalent
GND Faston male type Section area 6 sq. mm.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
125
14.4 GROUNDING CONNECTION
Fig.78 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.
Legend
1 IDU grounding point, faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 4 sq. mm. The
faston is available on the IDU both sides.
2 ODU grounding bolt. The cross section area of the cable used must be 16 sq. mm
3 IDUODU interconnection cable type Celflex CUH 1/4 terminated with Ntype male connectors at
both sides.
4 Grounding kit type Cabel Metal or similar to connect the shield of interconnection cable.
5 Matching cable (tail) terminated with N male and N female connectors.
6 Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length 10 m.
7 Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be 16 sq. mm
Fig.78 - Grounding connection
IDU
unit
ODU
unit
2
6
(+) (-)
4
Local
ground
rack
ground
Indoor
Station
ground
7
1 5
3 4 3
126
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
15 USER CONNECTIONS
15.1 CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 STANDARD VERSION
The user connections are performed through connectors on LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM modules. Fig.79 shows
connector position.
The connectors are the following:
LIM module
- Trib IN/OUT: connectors 1.0/2.3 female 75 Ohm type or SUBD 25 pins male 75 Ohm or 120
Ohm type. For SUBD connector details refer to Tab.24.
Controller module
- LCT:
RS232 type: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector detail refer to Tab.26.
USB type connector B receptable. For connector detail refer to USB standard.
- USER IN/OUT: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector details refer to Tab.33.
- RS232: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector detail see Tab.27.
- Q3: connector BNC or microSUBD 15 pins or RJ45. For SUBD and RJ45 connector details refer
to Tab.25 and Tab.28.
- CH1/CH2: connector RJ45. For connector details see Tab.30 and Tab.31.
- 2 Mbit/s: connector RJ45. For connector details see Tab.32.
RIM module
- connector TNC50 Ohm for interconnection to ODU
- connector SUBD, 3 pins for interconnection to battery.
15.2 CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0 COMPACT AND NON EXPANDABLE
VERSIONS
The user connections are performed through connectors on the IDU module. Fig.81 and Fig.82 show con-
nector position.
The connectors are the following:
Trib IN/OUT connectors up to 4x2 Mbit/s and up to 16x2 Mbit/s versions 1.0/2.3 female 75 Ohm
type or SUBD 25 pins male 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm type. For SUBD connector details refer to Tab.34
Trib IN/OUT connectors up to 8x2 Mbit/s version SUBD 25 pins male 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm type.
For SUBD connector details refer to Tab.34.
LCT:
RS232 type: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector detail refer to .
USB type connector B receptable. For connector detail refer to USB standard.
USER IN/OUT: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector details refer to Tab.35.
RS232: connector SUBD, 9 pins male type. For connector detail see Tab.36.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
127
Q3: connector BNC or microSUBD 15 pins or RJ45. For SUBD and RJ45 connector details refer to
Tab.37 and Tab.38.
CH1 connector RJ45 up to 4x2 Mbit/s version. For connector details see Tab.39.
connector TNC50 Ohm for interconnection to ODU
connector SUBD, 3 pins for interconnection to battery.
Fig.79 - User connector position, 1+0/1+1 standard version
Fig.80 - User connector posistion 1+0/1+1 standard version with Ethernet and 2 Mbit/s
Fig.81 - User connector position for IDU 1+0 compact (2, 2x2, 4x2 Mbit/s)
Fig.82 - User connector position for IDU 1+0 compact (2, 2x2, 4x2, 8x2 Mbit/s)
1 UNITA'
RIM
RIM
1
2
2
1
RIM
RIM
-
+
+
-
Trib: M-N-O-P Trib: I-J-K-L Trib: E-F-G-H
2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s
Trib: A-B-C-D
FAIL
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
TX RX
1
2 SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1
Q3
RS232 USER IN/OUT
A
WAY
LCT
RIM
CONTROLLER
LIM
R
IDU ODU TX RX
1
2
SIDE
A
WAY
D C
B A
10/100 BTX
2
2
1
RIM
RIM
RIM
RIM
1
2
USER IN/OUT LCT RS232
FAIL
DPLX
ACT
LINK
DPLX
ACT
LINK
DPLX
ACT
LINK
1 3
Q3
TEST REM CH1 CH2 2 Mbit/s +
+
-
-
RS232 Trib. 1-2-3-4
2Mb/s
USER IN/OUT LCT
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
Q3
+
-
CH1
A
A
-
+
Q3
REM TEST
ODU IDU
R
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232
2Mb/s
Trib. 5-6-7-8 Trib. 1-2-3-4
2Mb/s
128
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
15.3 STANDARD VERSION CONNECTORS
Tab.24 - Tributary connector pinout
Pin 120 Ohm impedance 75 Ohm impedance
a
a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pinout is referred to the flying connectors to be
connected to the equipment connectors.
1 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire) Ground
2 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 input
14 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground) Ground
15 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire) Ground
16 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 output
3 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground) Ground
4 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire) Ground
5 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 input
17 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground) Ground
18 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire) Ground
19 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 output
6 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground) Ground
7 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire) Ground
8 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 input
20 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground) Ground
21 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire) Ground
22 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 output
9 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground) Ground
10 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire) Ground
11 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 input
23 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground) Ground
24 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire) Ground
25 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 output
12 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground) Ground
13 Ground Ground
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
129
Tab.25 - 100BaseT connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin Description
Tab.26 - LCT connector pinout for connection to supervision system
Tab.27 - RSR232 connector pinout for supervision system
Pin Description
1 Tx+
2 Tx
3 Rx+
4
5
6 Rx
7
8
Pin Description
1
2 RxD
3 TxD
4
5 GND
6
7
8
9
Pin Description
1 Not connected
2 Rx D (IN)
3 Tx D (OUT)
4 Not connected
5 GND
6/7/8/9 --
130
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Tab.28 - Q3 AUI connector pinout for Ethernet connection
Tab.29 - CH1 connector pinout for 9600 bit/s V.24 interface
Tab.30 - CH1 connector pinout for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface
Pin Description
1 GND
2 ACX+
3 ATX+
4 GND
5 ARX+
6 GND
7 NC
8 GND
9 ACX
10 ATX
11 GND
12 ARX
13 12V
14 GND
15 NC
Pin Description
1 CKTx
2 TD
3 DTR
4 DSR
5 GND
6 RD9600
7 CKRx
8 DCD
Pin Description
1
2 TD (1 ch 9600 or 4800)
3 TD (2 ch 4800)
4
5 GND
6 RD (1 ch 9600 or 4800)
7
8 RD (2 ch 4800)
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
131
Tab.31 - CH2 connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface
Tab.32 - 2 Mbit/s connector pinout
Tab.33 - User in/out connector pinout for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside
Pin Description
1 DV11Tx
2 D+V11Tx
3 CV11Tx
4 C+V11Tx
5 DV11Rx
6 D+V11Rx
7 CV11Rx
8 C+V11Rx
Pin Description
1 TxC
2 TxF
3 GND
4
5 RxC
6 RxF
7 GND
8
Pin Description
1 C relay contact branch 1
2 NA/NC relay contact branch 1
3 C relay contact branch 2
4 NA/NC relay contact branch 2
5 User input 01
6 User input 02
7 User input 03
8 User input 04
9 GND
132
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
15.4 1/2 UNIT COMPACT VERSION CONNECTORS
Tab.34 - Tributary connector pinout
Pin 120 Ohm impedance 75 Ohm impedance
a
a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pinout is referred to the flying connectors to be
connected to the equipment connectors.
1 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire) Ground
2 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 input
14 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground) Ground
15 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire) Ground
16 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 output
3 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground) Ground
4 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire) Ground
5 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 input
17 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground) Ground
18 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire) Ground
19 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 output
6 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground) Ground
7 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire) Ground
8 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 input
20 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground) Ground
21 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire) Ground
22 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 output
9 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground) Ground
10 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire) Ground
11 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 input
23 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground) Ground
24 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire) Ground
25 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 output
12 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground) Ground
13 Ground Ground
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
133
Tab.35 - User in/out connector pinout for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside
Tab.36 - RS232 connector pinout for connection to/from supervision system
Tab.37 - Q3 connector pinout for 10BaseT Ethernet connection
Pin Description
1 C relay contact branch 1
2 NA/NC relay contact branch 1
3 --
4 --
5 User input 01
6 User input 02
7 User input 03
8 User input 04
9 GND
Pin Description
1 Not to be connected
2 Rx D (IN)
3 Tx D (OUT)
4 Not to be connected
5 GND
6 --
Pin Description
1 Tx+
2 Tx
3 Rx+
4 --
5 --
6 Rx
7 --
8 --
134
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Tab.38 - Q3 AUI connector pinout for Ethernet connection
Tab.39 - CH1 connector pinout for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface
Pin Description
1 GND
2 ACX+
3 ATX+
4 GND
5 ARX+
6 GND
7 NC
8 GND
9 ACX
10 ATX
11 GND
12 ARX
13 12V
14 GND
15 NC
Pin Description
1
2 TD (1 ch 9600 or 4800)
3 TD (2 ch 4800)
4
5 GND
6 RD (1 ch 9600 or 4800)
7
8 RD (2 ch 4800)
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
135
16 USER CONNECTIONS FOR IDU PLUS
16.1 CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 IDU PLUS VERSION
User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules (see Fig.83 and
Fig.84). The connectors are the following:
Trib IN/OUT: 75 or 120 50-pin female connector: for SCSI connector details Tab.40, Tab.41
LCT: USB connector B type receptable. For connector details see USB standard.
USER IN/OUT: SUB-D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.49
Q3/1 and Q3/2: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.42
50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU
48V: SUB-D 3 pin connector for interconnection to battery.
V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.47
V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.46
RS232 optional management interface. Connector details in Tab.43
2 Mbit/s wayside: optional 2 Mbit/s service channel. Connector details in Tab.48
Fig.83 - IDU Plus 1+1 (2x2 - 32x2 Mbit/s)
Fig.84 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 53x2 Mbit/s)
Tab.40 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm
Pin 75 Ohm
48 Ground A
23 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input
50 Ground A
25 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output
47 Ground A
22 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input
+-
- +
Q3/1
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1 RS232 USER IN/OUT LCT
A WAY
Q3/2
FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
Q3/2
WAY
A
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE
REM TEST
ODU IDU
R
Q3/1
+-
- +
FAIL
Trib: 33-40 Trib: 41-48 Trib: 49-53
136
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.
Fig.85 - Pin-out Tributary IN/OUT 50 SCSI
45 Ground A
20 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output
42 Ground A
17 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input
43 Ground A
18 TributaryTributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output
40 Ground A
15 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input
39 Ground A
14 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output
36 Ground B
11 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input
37 Ground B
12 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output
34 Ground B
9 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input
33 Ground B
8 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output
29 Ground B
4 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
31 Ground B
6 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output
28 Ground B
3 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input
26 Ground B
1 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 25
26 50
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
137
Tab.41 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm
Pin 120 Ohm
49 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input
23 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input
44 Ground A
24 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output
25 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output
44 Ground A
21 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input
22 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input
44 Ground A
46 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output
20 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output
44 Ground A
16 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input
17 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input
44 Ground A
19 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output
18 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output
44 Ground A
41 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input
15 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input
44 Ground A
13 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output
14 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output
44 Ground A
10 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input
11 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input
32 Ground B
38 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output
12 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output
32 Ground B
35 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input
9 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input
32 Ground B
7 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output
8 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output
32 Ground B
138
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Tab.42 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection
Tab.43 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface
5 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
4 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input
32 Ground B
30 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output
6 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output
32 Ground B
27 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input
3 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input
32 Ground B
2 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
1 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output
32 Ground B
Pin Description
1 Tx+
2 Tx-
3 Rx+
4 --
5 --
6 Rx-
7 --
8 --
Pin Description
1 DCD (IN)
2 RD (IN)
3 TD (OUT)
4 DTR (OUT)
5 GND
6 Not connected
7 RTS (OUT)
8 CTS (IN)
9 Not connected
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
139
Tab.44 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface
Tab.45 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface
Tab.46 - CH1 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface
Pin Description
1 CKTx
2 TD
3 DTR
4 DSR
5 GND
6 RD9600
7 CKRx
8 DCD
Pin Description
1 --
2 TxD
3 DTR
4 DSR
5 GND
6 RxD
7 --
8 DCD
Pin Description
1 --
2 TD (1 ch 9600 or 4800)
3 TD (2 ch 4800)
4 --
5 GND
6 RD (1 ch 9600 or 4800)
7 --
8 RD (2 ch 4800)
140
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Tab.47 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface
Tab.48 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out
Tab.49 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out
Pin Description
1 D-V11-Tx
2 D+V11-Tx
3 C-V11-Tx
4 C+V11-Tx
5 D-V11-Tx
6 D+V11-Tx
7 C-V11-Tx
8 C+V11-Tx
Pin Description
1 Tx-C (IN) commun
2 TX-F (IN) 120 Ohm
3 GND
4 TX-F (IN) 75 Ohm
5 Rx-C (OUT) commun
6 Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm
7 GND
8 Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm
Pin Description
1 C relay contact- branch 1
2 NA/NC relay contact - branch 1
3 C relay contact - branch 2
4 NA/NC relay contact - branch 2
5 User input 01
6 User input 02
7 User input 03
8 User input 04
9 Ground
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
141
17 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
17.1 INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:
1+0 version
- antisliding strip (see Fig.86)
- supporting plate plus 60114 mm pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.87)
- adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.88)
- Band-it fixing system (see Fig.91)
- antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.89)
- support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.87)
- connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.89)
- kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+1 version
- antisliding strip (see Fig.86)
- supporting plate plus pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.87)
- adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.88)
- hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.90)
- flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.89)
- kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.
Warning: in order to avoid damages to flexible waveguides, dont fold or twist them more than values spec-
ified as limit in installation instructions of the waveguide supplier.
17.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
N.2 13mm torque wrench
N.1 15 mm torque wrench
N.1 17 mm torque wrench
N.1 3 mm Allen wrench
142
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
17.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:
Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
2
Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the support plate by Band-it
Version 1+1: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
2
Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)
ODU grounding
1+0 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
Fig.86 Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)
Fig.87 Adhere the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60114 mm pole (see Fig.87). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.
Warning: As shown in Fig.88 an adapting kit must be used for the 219 mm pole. It consists of an additional
plate to enlarge the standard supporting plate dimension and relevant Ubolt for 219 mm pole fixing.
Fig.89 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.50 - Torques for tightening screws
Fig.89 Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.89) or vertically as function of convenience.
Fig.90 Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.90 shows the possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
1+0 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate by B
In case of 1+0 ODU installation, a Band-it pole mounting kit can be used: through slots (see Fig.91) on
the supporting plate two metallic bands secure the plate on the pole. Band characteristics are:
thickness 0.76 mm
width 19 mm.
1+1 version Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
Fig.86 Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)
Fig.87 Position the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60114 mm pole (see Fig.87). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate kit. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.
2 In case of 219 mm pole, an adapting kit is supplied for the purpose.
Frequencies Screw Tool Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm
up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
143
Fig.92 Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.
Fig.92 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.51 - Torques for tightening screws
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.95. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
Installation of the ODU
1 Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE
4 to the Oring of Fig.94.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.
2 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.
3 Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.94) to antenna side flange ( see Fig.89 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.92 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.93 depending on the polarisation.
4 With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.89 1+0 version or Fig.92 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail Fig.94)
5 When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.
6 Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.89 1+0 version or Fig.92 1+1
version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.95. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.
17.4 GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.96.
Frequencies Screw Tool Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm
up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm
144
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.86 - Antisliding strip
Antisliding strip
Plastic blocks
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
145
Fig.87 - 60114 mm pole supporting plate fixing
Supporting plate
Use 15 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)
Use 17 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)
146
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.88 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
147
1 13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
Fig.89 - Mounting position
Antenna side flange
Support with ODU fast
lockinh mechanism
Dente di riferimento
Position of antenna
side flange
Reference tooth
1
1
148
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.90 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism
Adapting kit for 219 mm pole
A
B
C
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
149
Fig.91 - Band-it pole mounting kit
150
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.92 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate
Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)
Reference tooth
Reference tooth
Hybrid with ODU fast
locking mechanism
1
1
RT1 RT2
Optional vawe
guide
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
151
Fig.93 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisa-
tion is always vertical: handle at the left side.
Vertical Horizontal
152
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.94 - ODU body reference tooth
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
ODU side flange
Reference tooth
O-ring
AL version
AS version
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
153
Fig.95 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
Suncover (optional)
AL version
AS version
154
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.96 - ODU grounding
1
2
4
3
5
AL version
AS version
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
155
18 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
18.1 INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:
1+0 version
- wall supporting plate with additional contact surface extension plates (see Fig.97)
- antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.98)
- support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.98)
- connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.98)
- kit for ground connection making part of ODU
1+1 version
- supporting plate with additional contact surface extension tools (see Fig.97)
- hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.100)
- connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.98)
- kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.
18.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
N.2 13mm torque wrench
N.1 15 mm torque wrench
N.1 17 mm torque wrench
N.1 3 mm allen wrench.
18.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:
version 1+0: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
version 1+1: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)
ODU grounding.
156
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
1+0 version Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
Fig.97 Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.
Fig.97 Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.
Fig.98 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.52 - Torques for tightening screws
Fig.98 Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.98) or vertically as function of convenience.
Fig.99 Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.99 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
1+1 version Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
Fig.97 Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.
Fig.97 Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.
Fig.100 Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.
Fig.100 Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:
Tab.53 - Torques for tightening screws
Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.103 This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.
Installation of the ODU
1 Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE
4 to the Oring of Fig.102.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.
2 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.
3 Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.102) to antenna side flange (see Fig.98 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.100 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.101 depending on the polarisation.
4 With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.98 1+0 version or Fig.100 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail
Fig.102)
Frequencies Screw Tool Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm
up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm
Frequencies Screw Tool Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm
up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
157
5 When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.
6 Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.98 1+0 version or Fig.100 1+1
version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.103. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.
18.4 GROUNDING
The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.104.
158
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.97 - Wall supporting plate
Extension plate
Supporting plate
M8 bolt and nut
Another possible fixation
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
159
Fig.98 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism
Antenna side flange
Support with ODU fast
locking mechanism
Reference tooth
Position of antenna
side flange
Reference tooth
1
1
13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
160
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.99 - Mounting possible positions
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
161
Fig.100 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate
Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)
Reference tooth
Hybrid with ODU fast
locking mechanism
1
1
RT1 RT2
Optional wave
guide
Reference tooth
162
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.101 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polari-
sation is always vertical: handle at the left side.
Vertical Horizontal
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
163
Fig.102 - ODU body reference tooth
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
ODU side flange
Reference tooth
O-ring
AS version
AL version
164
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.103 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version
Suncover (optional)
AS version
AL version
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
165
1 Bolt
2 Spring washer
3 Flat washer
4 Earth cable collar
5 Flat washer
Fig.104 - ODU grounding
1
2
4
3
5
AS version
AL version
166
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
19 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA
19.1 FOREWORD
The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 versions.
19.2 INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:
1+0 version
60 to 114 mm pole mounting kit consisting of:
- centering ring and relevant screws (see Fig.105)
- antislide strip (see Fig.106)
- pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.107)
- ODU with Oring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version
pole mounting kit from 60 to 114 mm for 1+1 consisting of:
- centering ring and relevant screws (see Fig.105)
- antislide strip (see Fig.106)
- pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.107)
hybrid mechanical body (see Fig.116)
polarization twist disk (see Fig.117)
2 ODUs with Orings and devices for ground connection.
19.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
N.2 13 mm torque wrench
N.1 15 mm torque wrench
N.1 17 mm torque wrench
N.1 3 mm allen wrench.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
167
19.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according with the following steps:
1+0 version
1 installation onto the pole of the support system
2 installation of the antenna
3 installation of ODU
4 antenna aiming
5 ODU grounding
1+1 version
1 installation onto the pole of the support system
2 installation of the antenna
3 installation of hybrid circuit
4 installation of the two ODUs
5 antenna aiming
6 ODU grounding.
19.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna
Fig.105 Set the antenna in such a position as to be able to operate on its rear side. Locate the five thread-
ed holes around antenna flange. Mount centering ring onto antenna flange and tight it with 3 calibrated
bolts.
Caution: centering ring should be mounted so that the screws do not stick out.
Define if the antenna will be mounted with vertical or horizontal polarization. Check that free drain holes
stay at bottom side. Mount bolt type M10x30, in position A leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. With horizontal
polarization mount bolt type M10x30 in position D, leaving it loose of 2 cm approx.
Fig.106 Mount antislide strip onto the pole. Place blocks as in Fig.106 following antenna aiming direction.
Tighten the strip with screwdriver.
Fig.107 Mount pole supporting system with relevant pole fixing brackets following antenna aiming direc-
tion as indicated by arrow. Antislide strip should result at the center of supporting plate. Supporting system
should lean against antislide clamp with the tooth as in Fig.108. Position the antenna in such a way that
bolt in position A or D of Fig.105 cross through hole E of Fig.109. Secure the support system to the pole
by means of the pole fixing brackets and relevant fixing bolts.
Fig.110 Rotate the antenna body until the remainder three antenna holes coincide with the three support
holes. Secure the antenna to the support by thightening the relevant passing through bolts.
168
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
19.4.2 Installation of ODU
1+0 version
1 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring (4) of Fig.113 by protecting finger hands
with gloves.
2 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The ODU handle
can assume position of Fig.111 depending on the polarization.
3 Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.112). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignemnt between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.112) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.113).
4 When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.
Fig.114 and Fig.115 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respec-
tively.
5 Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.112.
1+1 version
Fig.116 Apply silicon grease, type RHODOSIL PATE 4 to Orings (1). Insert Orings (1) and (6) into
twist polarization disk (2).
Vertical polarization
Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing marker (4), on disk, close to V mark.
Horizontal polarization
Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing reference (4), on disk, close to H mark.
Caution: Twist disk has two planes. Take care of position marker (4) on twist disk. The position of marker
(4) plane should be in contact to hybrid like in figure. Tighten progressively and alternatively four screws
(7) with four spring washers (8) with the following torque:
Tab.54 - Torques for tightening screws
Fig.117 Fix hybrid to support system with four bolts (1) taking care of RT1/RT2 position shown by labels
of Fig.117. Tighten progressively and alternatively four bolts (1).
19.4.3 ODU installation
The installation procedure of the two ODUs is the same.
1 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring (4) of the Fig.113 by protecting finger
hands with gloves.
2 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. For 1+0 the
ODU can assune position of Fig.111 depending on the polarisation. For 1+1 the handle ODU position
is always placed at the right side (horizontal polarization).
3 Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.112). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 anticlockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignemnt between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.112) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.113).
Frequencies Screw Tool Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm
up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
169
4 When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until clack is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.
Fig.114 and Fig.115 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respec-
tively for 1+0 version.
Fig.118 shows ODU housing final position for 1+1 version.
5 Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.112.
19.5 ANTENNA AIMING
Antenna aiming for 1+0 version and 1+1 version is the same. The antenna aiming devices allow to perform
the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position:
- Horizontal 15 operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.119, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.120.
- vertical 15 operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.119
only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.120 and (4) and (5) of
Fig.119.
For adjustment from 0 to +30 extract nut (1) Fig.120 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.120 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.120 and (4) of Fig.119.
For adjustment from 0 to 30 extract nut (1) of Fig.120 and position it in
hole (3), extract nut (2) of Fig.120 and position it in hole (5). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.120 and (4) of Fig.119.
For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10, are available on support.
The bigger marker gives 0 starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming
position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.120 and
(4) and (5) of Fig.119 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9),
(10) of Fig.120 for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and
32 Nm torque.
19.6 COMPATIBILITY
The pole installation kit of the ODU unit in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is compatible with integrated antenna
complying with SIAE standard with measures 0.2 m, 0.4 m, 0.6 m, 0.8 m of diameter.
19.7 GROUNDING
See Fig.121.
On ODU grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown.
170
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
1 Antenna
2 Calibrated Allen screw
3 Centering ring
Fig.105 - Centering ring position
A
B C
D D
A B
C
A
B
C
1
2
3
horizontal polarization
Vertical polarization
3 mm allen key
2,5 Nm torque
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
171
1 Steel belt
2 Plastic blocks
Fig.106 - Antislide strip
1
2
172
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
1 Pole fixing brackets
2 Tooth
3 Bolt
4 Pole support system
Fig.107 - Support mount on pole
2
3
Antenna aiming direction
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
1
3
1
3
3 3
3
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
173
1 Tooth
Fig.108 - Supporting system position
Fig.109 - Hole E
1
Antenna aiming direction
E
174
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
A, B, C, D Bolt slots
Fig.110 - Antenna installation on pole support
Fig.111 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polari-
sation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
D A
B C
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
Vertical
Horizontal
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
175
H: Reference tooth
Fig.112 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence
1
1
1
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
1
176
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.113 - ODU body reference tooth
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
ODU side flange
Reference tooth
O-ring
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
177
Fig.114 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization
Fig.115 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization
30 5
30 5
30 5
178
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
1 Oring
2 Polarization twist disk
3 Hybrid mechanical body
4 Position marker of twist disk
5 Reference label for twist disk
6 Oring
7 Allen screws
8 Spring washer
Fig.116 - Hybrid and twist disk
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
179
1 Bolts
2 Spring washer
Fig.117 - Hybrid mount on pole support
2
1
1
13 mm wrench
18 Nm torque
RT2
RT1
180
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.118 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version
AL version
AS version
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
181
1 Marker
2 Vertical adjustment
3 Horizontal adjustment
4 Bolt
5 Fixing nut
Fig.119 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments
1
2
3
4
5
182
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
1., 2., 3., 4. Horizontal aiming block bolts
5., 6., 7. Vertical aiming block bolts
8., 11. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to 30
9., 10. Threaded hole for vertical aimimg up to +30
Fig.120 - Antenna aiming block
2
1
3
5
4
6
9
10
8
7
11
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
183
1 Bolt
2 Spring washer
3 Flat washer
4 Earth cable collar
5 Flat washer
Fig.121 - ODU grounding
1
2
4
3
5
AL version
AS version
184
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
20 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307,
V32308, V32309)
20.1 FOREWORD
The description concerns pole mounting of ODU, in 1+0 and 1+1 version, using following installation kits:
- V32307 for ODU with frequency from 10 to 13 GHz
- V32308 for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz
- V32309 for ODU with frequency from 7 to 8 GHz
Differences regard the dimensions and the presence of the centring ring (see Fig.122):
- V32307 centring ring for antenna flange from 10 to 13 GHz
- V32308 centring ring for antenna flange from 15 to 38 GHz
- V32309 no centring ring (and relevant screws).
20.2 INSTALLATION KIT
Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.
1+0 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:
- centring ring and relevant screws
- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
- 1+0 ODU support and relevant screws
- ODU with Oring and devices for ground connection
1+1 version
60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:
- centring ring and relevant screws
- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
- 1+0 ODU support
- hybrid and relevant screws
- polarization twist disk and relevant screws
- 2 ODUs with Orings and devices for ground connection.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
185
20.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench
N.1 3 mm Allen wrench
N.1 6 mm Allen wrench
N.1 13 mm spanner
N.2 17 mm spanner.
20.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure is listed below:
1+0 version
1 antenna polarization
2 installation of the centring ring on the antenna
3 installation of 1+0 ODU support
4 installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
5 installation of ODU
6 antenna aiming
7 ODU grounding
1+1 version
1 antenna polarization
2 installation of the centring ring on the antenna
3 installation of 1+0 ODU support
4 installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
5 installation of hybrid
6 installation of ODUs
7 antenna aiming
8 ODU grounding.
186
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
20.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES
20.5.1 Setting antenna polarization
Fig.122 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange ac-
cording on: horizontal wave guide > vertical polarization, vertical wave guide > horizontal polariza-
tion. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).
20.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna
Fig.122 Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).
20.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support
Fig.122 Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.
20.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure
Fig.122 Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.
20.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)
Fig.123 Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4) on the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.124 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.125) and reference tooth on the ODU body.
Fig.126 When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.
Fig.125 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
187
20.5.6 Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.
Horizontal aiming: 5 operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.127 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.
Vertical aiming: 20 operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.127 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.
Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.
20.5.7 ODU grounding
ODU grounding is achieved with:
M8 screw without washers
M6 screw with washer
as shown in Fig.128.
20.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES
In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph 20.5 1+0 MOUNT-
ING PROCEDURES.
20.6.1 Installation of Hybrid
Fig.129 The polarization twist disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHO-
DOSIL PATE 4) on the Orings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the
position marker down. Insert the Oring into polarization twist disk.
Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.
Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.
Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws and spring washer with following torque:
Tab.55 - Torques for tightening screws
Fig.130 Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.
Frequencies Screw Tool Torque
from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm
up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm
188
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
20.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)
For both ODUs.
Fig.123 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4 to the Oring by protecting fingers with gloves.
Fig.124 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30 counterclockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.
Fig.131 When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rota-
tion stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.
Fig.125 When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).
WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The
Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.
Fig.122 - 1+0 pole mounting
Four 13mm
screws
Two bushes
1+0 support
Three 3mm Allen screws
(not present in V32309)
Centring ring
(not present in V32309)
Antenna
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
189
Fig.123 - ODU body reference tooth
Fig.124 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polar-
isation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.
"N"
"BNC"
Ground bolt
ODU wave guide
Reference tooth
O-ring
Vertical
Horizontal
190
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
1 6 mm Allen screw
2 Bush (diagonally placed)
3 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)
4 Reference point for horizontal polarization
5 Reference point for vertical polarization
Fig.125 - 1+0 support
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
3
4
5
4
5
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
191
Fig.126 - ODU housing final position for both polarization
1+0 ODU HP with handle on the right:
horizontal polarization
1+0 ODU standard with handle on the left:
vertical polarization
192
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.127 - Antenna aiming
Horizontal aiming:
two 17mm block screws
Vertical aiming:
13mm block screws
Pole support
17mm nut for horizontal
adjustment of antenna
Internal 5mm Allen
screw for vertical
adjustment of antenna
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
193
1 Bolt
2 Spring washer
3 Flat washer
4 Earth cable collar
5 Flat washer
Fig.128 - ODU grounding
1
2
4
3
5
AL version
AS version
194
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
1 Oring
2 Polarization twist disk
3 Hybrid mechanical body
4 Position marker of twist disk
5 Reference label for twist disk
6 Oring
7 Allen screws
8 Spring washer
Fig.129 - Hybrid and twist disk
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
195
Fig.130 - Hybrid installation
196
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.131 - 1+1 ODUs installation
AL version
AS version
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
197
21 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHZ
ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)
21.1 INSTALLATION KIT
1+0 version
antisliding bracket
ODU pole support and relevant screws
1+0 version
antisliding bracket
ODU pole support and relevant screws
hybrid and relevant screws
hybridODU connecting cables
21.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
N.2 13 mm spanner
N.1 15 mm spanner
N.1 17 mm spanner.
21.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure is listed below:
1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the support
1+1 version: installation of the hybrid on the support
installation of the ODU on the support
ODU grounding and connection of the cables to the hybrid and antenna
198
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the support
Fig.132 Install antisliding device (1) around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the
position of the support (2) and of the relevant hooking pin (3).
Hook the support to the plastic blocks by means of the hooking pin. Insert to the four screws (4) in the
relevant holes, set the two brackets (5) and clamp them around the pole tightening the four nuts (6) (tight-
ening torque = 32 Nm).
Cover the projecting bits of the screws using the relevant red covers (7).
The two holes (8) house the two tightening screws of the hybrid (only for 1+1 version).
1+1 version: hybrid installation on the support
Fig.133 Set the hybrid (1) on the support (2) in such a way that the connectors are downward and that
the holes on the lower side of the hybrid match with the corresponding holes (8) of the Fig.132.
Insert the two screws (3) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm) and tighten the hybrid to the support.
ODU installation on the support
Locate the part of the support more suitable for the installation of the ODU: both the parts can be used
(1+0 version).
Fig.133 Locate the four slots (4) on the support (2).
Fig.134 Keeping the knob of the ODU1 downward, partially screw the two screws (2) into the two upper
holes of the ODU, on N connector side.
Hook the heads of the two screws (2) of the Fig.134 into the slots (4) of the Fig.133.
Insert also the remaining screws (2) into the holes (3).
Tighten all the four screws (2) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm).
Put the suncover (5) over the ODU (1) and fix it to the knob of the ODU by means of the supplied strip.
In case of 1+1 version, repeat the whole procedure for the second ODU.
ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna
Fig.135 Tighten the grounding cable of each ODU by means of grounding bolt (1) (tightening torque =
7.3 Nm) and the relevant washer. For the connection of the RF cable follow the label on the bottom of the
hybrid: ODU1 (RT1) is that connected to RIM1 of IDU, ODU 2 (RT2) is that connected to RIM2 of IDU.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
199
Fig.132 - Pole installation of the support
4
4
4
4
8
2
3
6
7
6
7
5
5
1
200
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.133 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole support (only for 1+1 version)
2
3
1
4
4
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
201
Fig.134 - Installation of the ODU on the support
5
2 3
1
202
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.135 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna
1
1
RT2
RT1
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
203
Section 4.
LINE-UP
22 LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP
22.1 LINEUP OF THE RADIO HOP
The lineup consists of the following steps:
on site radio terminal installation (perform user connections and ODU installation as described in
the relevant chapters)
equipment switchon (operate the ON/OFF switch on the RIM front)
antenna alignment for maximum received RF signal level
network element configuration
check measurements.
22.1.1 Antenna alignment and received field measurement
Purpose of antenna alignment is to maximize the RF received signal level.
Proceed as follows:
connect a multimeter to BNC connector on the ODU for AGC measurement
adjust antenna pointing as soon as the maximum AGC voltage value is achieved.
The relationship between AGC voltage and received field is shown by Fig.136.
The received field level has a tolerance of 4 dB in the full temperature range.
204
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
22.1.2 Network element configuration
A factory default address is assigned to each network element that must normally be reconfigurated on
site following the network administrator rules.
To the purpose it is required to connect the PC, where the SCT/LCT program has been installed, to the
network interfaces.
This has to be done via serial cable or Ethernet cable.
Warning: the checks that follow require a good knowledge of the program use.
The description of each menu and relevant windows are given by the program itself as help on line.
Run the program and perform the connection to equipment by choosing from menu Option the connec-
tion made via serial cable.
Perform the login to the equipment by entering:
Equipment IP address
3
User ID (default: SYSTEM)
Password: (default: siaemicr)
Proceed to program what above mentioned following this path:
IP Address: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Communication Setup>Port
Configuration. Enter the required port addresses in the available communication ports. Press ? for
details.
Routing Table and Default Gateway: select menu Equipment from the menu bar and then Com-
munication Setup>Routing table: enter the routes or default gateway if necessary. Press ? for de-
tails.
Warning: the routing policy depends on the routing type: manual IP/OSPF/ISIS. The relevant
routing rules must be normally given by network administrator.
Remote Element Table: select menu Tools from menu bar and then Subnetwork Configuration
Wizard. Station name and remote element table must be assigned following description of the con-
textual help online (?).
Agent IP Address: select menu Equipment and then Properties. Assign the address in accord-
ance to the address of the remote element you want to reach.
22.1.3 Radio checks
It is advisable to perform the following measurements to check the correct operation of the radio hop:
transmitted power
received power
RF frequency
BER measurement
All these checks make use of the SCT/LCT program.
Transmitted power, received RF level, RF frequency
- run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.
- make double click on the select equipment until main RADIO PDHAL window is shown.
- on top of the window Tx/Rx power and frequency values are displayed. In case of Tx power and
frequency setup proceed to Branch 1/2 and Power/Frequencies submenus.
BER measurement
- Run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.
3 If the connection is made via serial cable, the IP address is automatically achieved.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
205
- Make double click on the selected equipment until main RADIO PDHAL window is shown.
- On the left side select BER1/2 measure.
In alternative it is possible to use the PRBS function if one or 2 Mbit/s line is free.
- Perform the BER measurement and check that values comply with the requirements.
Fig.136 - Detected voltage versus Rf received signal
-100 -80 -60 -40 -20
3
2,25
1,5
0,75
0
dBm
V
-70 -50 -30
1,125
1,875
2,625
206
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
23 LINEUP OF LIM ETHERNET/2 MBIT/S
23.1 GENERAL
This paragraph deals with lineup of LIM Ethernet module with details of SCT/LCT program related only to
Ethernet application.
Assuming that the radio link is already in service, with correct frequency, output power and correct antenna
alignment, the line up procedure for two different kinds of connection set up of a radio link AL, equipped
with LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s module, is hereafter described:
1 Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection Lam per port, see Fig.137
2 Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection with only VLANs
3 3 to 1 port connections, see Fig.150.
Settings here below are intended to be done both into local and remote radio equipment.
23.2 LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT
CONNECTION LAN PER PORT
Settings for Untagged and Tagged Traffic
Fig.137 - Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection
The lineup of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of SCT/LCT program.
Please refer to Fig.138. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we
select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on terms of li-
cence provided by Siae Microelettronica).
Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select Tributary window (see
Fig.139). If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the Tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/
s input/output on the front panel. When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the
others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s ca-
pacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12
Mbit/s full duplex.
AL
radio
port 1
switch
Lan-1
AL
radio
port 1
switch
Lan-2
Lan-3
Nx2
Mbit/s
Local
Lan-1
Lan-2
Lan-3
Nx2
Mbit/s
Remote
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
207
Fig.138 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput
Fig.139 - Tributary enable
208
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
See Fig.140 for General settings for the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan1 and
Internal Port, see Fig.141.
The other ports should be disabled. The correct cable crossover arrangement must be selected too (see
Fig.141). Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up.
For Untagged traffic, connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.142 incoming traf-
fic at Lan1 exits at Internal Port and into Fig.144 incoming traffic at Internal Port exits at lan1 port. This
connection are done for all Untagged traffic and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described into Vlan
Configuration Table.
If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port.
Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check:
1 Disable 802.1q: no check of Virtual Lan tag is made and all packets follow Lan per port settings
2 Fallback: if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the con-
nection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged pack-
ets
3 Secure: no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can
transit. For all pass configuration Disable 802.1 should be selected. With Egress Mode as Unmodi-
fied the outgoing packets at Lan1 port exit Untagged or Tagged exactly as they were Untagged or
Tagged at the incoming port.
Fig.140 - Switch general settings
Link Loss
Forwarding
Histeresys
Click here for Port mapping and
VLAN configuration table
Output policy
for Tagged
packets: Level
2 priority, if
used, defined
for all the ports
for incoming
packets
already Tagged
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
209
Fig.141 - Lan1 interface settings
Fig.142 - Vlan settings for Lan1
210
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.143 - Priority setting for Lan1 and Internal Port
With Priority disabled no check is done into 802.1p priority Tag. All types of packets go into Default Priority
Queue.
Fig.144 - Vlan settings for Internal Port
Invoming
Untagged
packets at
Lan-1 are sent
into output part
queue following
this selection.
In this example
packets are
inserted into
queue 0
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
211
Fig.145 - Vlan Configuration Table
23.3 LOCAL LAN1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN1 PORT TRANSPARENT
CONNECTION LAN PER PORT
Settings are done to transfer only Tagged traffic within some Vlans.
We want that Vlan 701, 702, 710 and 1, 2, 3 can pass into the radio link and all the other Tagged or Un-
tagged packets should be blocked.
The line up of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of LCT/SCT program. Please refer to Fig.137.
First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and
modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depends on terms of licence provided by Siae
Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements.
Inside LCT, select tributary window (see Fig.138). If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary
window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front panel. When the activation of required
2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet
traffic. for instance with a 16 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to ethernet cir-
cuits is automatically set to 162x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex.
See Fig.139 for general settings for the switch. All the used ports must be enabled, so enable Lan1 and
Internal Port, see Fig.140. The other port should be disabled. The correct Cable crossover arrangement
must be selected too. Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up.
Vlan settings for Lan1 and Internal Port should be like in Fig.146 with Ingress Filtering Check as Secure
and Engress Mode as Tagged. With this setting only Tagged packets with Vlan ID listed into the Vlan Con-
figuration Table can transit. All Untagged packets are blocked at the incoming port and outgoing Tagged
packets dont change.
A packet with Vlan ID XX can enter into the switch only if Incoming Port (Ingress port) is a member of the
Vlan XX, same packet will exit only from ports (Engress Port) which are members of Vlan XX. Vlan mem-
bership is described into Vlan Configuration Table. A port can be member of no one, one or more Vlans.
See Fig.147 for Vlan Configuration Table settings for our example.
212
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.146 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan1 port
Fig.147 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans
Tagged incoming packet can be treated with FIFO policy or on the basis of their 802.1p priority tag and
ToS/DSCP value for IP packets. There are 4 queue at each output port. The decision about to which output
queue to send a packet is defined into Ethernet switch window selections for 802.1p tag. Into Ethernet
switch window it is possible to select ToS/DSCP button to open window ToS/DSCP, in this window each
incoming ToS/DSCP value is associated with an output queue so it is possible to change the priority of the
incoming packet.
When no info on priority is available, the packet is sent to Default Priority Queue using FIFO policy.
Into Lan1 window select Priority (802.1q), into priority box there are some selections: with Disable
switch doesnt look at priority tag; with 802.1p switch looks at Tag 802.1p only; with IpToS for IP pack-
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
213
ets only switch looks to ToS/DSCP identifier (into IP frame) only; with 802.1p IpToS switch looks first
to 802.1p tag and secondly to ToS/DSCP, see Fig.149; with IpToS802.1p switch looks first to ToS/DSCP
and secondly to Tag 802.1p.
Note: with IpToS switch looks to IP packet and ToS/DSCP doesnt matter if the packets are tagged with
802.1p or not.
In this example incoming tagged are tagged and it is necessary to transfer the packets with no change so
they must exit from output ports tagged, see Fig.147 and Fig.148.
Fig.148 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged
Fig.149 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management
Incoming
Untagged
packets at
Lan-1 are sent
into output part
queue following
this selection.
In this example
packets are
inserted into
queue 0.
214
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
23.4 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS
Fig.150 - 3 to 1 port connections
In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding remote ports. All the ports share the
same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from
Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa.
Lan1 to Lan1 connection should transfer tagged packets with Vlan 1, 701, 760 and untagged packets.
Unspecified tagged packets must be stopped. Lan2 and Lan3 have the same requirements. For all con-
nections IP packets with high priority TOS should transferred at minimum delay.
23.5 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAF-
FIC
The lineup of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of LCT/SCT. Please refer to Fig.137.
First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and
modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on terms of licence provided by Siae
Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements.
Inside LCT, select Tributary window (see Fig.138).
If 2 Mbit/s tributaries sre needed, inside the tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/
output on the front panel. When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others
2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity if
we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12 Mbit/s full
duplex.
Vlan Configuration Table will be defined in order to group traffic from Lan1, Lan2, Lan3 to Port1. All the
used ports must be Enabled.
Untagged traffic transits only if the selection for Ingress Filtering Check is disabled at each input port and
a separated Vlan for Untagged traffic is set up for each port. See Fig.139, Fig.140, Fig.149, Fig.150,
Fig.151.
Each port of the switch must be associated with a different Default VLAN ID in order to maintain the traffic
coming from different separated LANs, Lan1 with default VID 3301, Lan2 with default VID 3302, Lan3
with default VID 3303, for Lan1 see Fig.151, Fig.152 and Fig.154.
The correct Cable Crossover arrangement must be selected too.
AL
radio
port 1
switch
Lan-1
AL
radio
port 1
switch
Lan-2
Lan-3
Nx2
Mbit/s
Local
Lan-1
Lan-2
Lan-3
Nx2
Mbit/s
Remote
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
215
Fig.151 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan1 port
Fig.152 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301
216
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.153 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration
With the above settings inside the VLAN configuration Table only Untagged traffic is forwarded accross the
bridge.
The same settings should be done inside the remote equipment. The above example shows the Virtual Lan
Configuration Table in case of a link carrying the traffic of 3 independent LANs connected to Lan1, Lan
2, Lan3, which is split at the remote end among the outgoing Lan1, Lan2, Lan3 ports, while using a
common radio link.
To prioritize some IP packets with high ToS/DSCP value it is possible to open PToS/DSCP window from Eth-
ernet switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue, see
Fig.154.
Fig.154 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DSCP priority
Default VID assigned by
user to each port
Vlan 3301, 3302, 3303 are allowed to exit at Port1
with tags (Tagged). Different default Tags allow to
keep separate the traffic from Lan1, Lan2 and
Lan3 exiting at Port 1. At the remote end the traffic
is split and forwarded from Port1 to Lan1, Lan 2
and Lan3 without Tag to preserve the original
format.
TOS value description DSCP value description
Packets
with AF43
priority
level will
go into
Queue 3 at
all ports
AF43 now goes to Queue 3, with this
button AF43 will go to Queue 2
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
217
23.6 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UN-
TAGGED TRAFFIC
If we want VLAN with Tag 701, 702 and 703 to transit between Lan1 and Port1 it is necessary to define
Port 1 and Lan 1 as members of VLAN1, 701, 760 (see Fig.155 for VLAN 701 and do the same for VLAN1,
760).
The VLAN Configuration Table will look like Fig.156.
For Lan2 and Lan3 we cannot use the same Vlan if we want to maintain traffic from Lan 1, 2, 3 separated.
We must change the number of incoming Vlan for instance of 1, 701, 760 use 2001, 2701, 2760 for Lan
2 and 3001, 3701, 3760 for Lan3. Connected equipment to Lan2 port should be reprogrammed to use
Vlan 2001, 2701, 2760.
Connected equipment to Lan3 port should be reprogrammed to use Vlan 3001, 3701, 3760.
To prioritize Ip packets with high ToS/DSCP value it is possible to open PToS/DSCP window from Ethernet
switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue 3, see
Fig.152. The same should be done inside the remote equipment.
Fig.155 - Output properties of VLAN 701
218
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.156 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan
23.7 3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT
Example 1: To assign to Lan1 and Lan3 low priority and to Lan2 high priority, while wanting Tagged
and Untagged to be treated in a fair manner on each queue do as follow: select Priority Disable for Lan1,
Lan2 and Lan3; select Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 0 for lan1 and Lan3 (see Fig.143). Select
Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 3 for Lan2 (as in Fig.157).
Outgoing Untagged packets will take priority tag defined into input port, in this case 0. Tagged frames keep
their tag.
Example 2: Wanting tagged frames to be treated according their actual priority and untagged packets with
low priority, all inputs should be configured as in Fig.158.
Layer 2 Priority assignment is not modified if inside the second folder of the LanX (1, 2, 3) configuration
window Untagged Frame Egress Mode = Unmodified is selected as in Fig.159.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
219
Fig.157 - Queue selection
Untagged packet arriving to Lan-2 are sent to output port Queues setting of this
folder. In this example all incoming packets at LAN-2 are inserted into output
Queue 3 of output ports.
Input priority: when Disable is not selected, Tagged frame are sent to queue
0,1,2,3 to port destination priority value; when Disabled is selected for this port
switch uses the Default Priority Queue for Tagged and Untagged frames, and
without really changing Tag into Incoming Tagged frames.
220
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.158 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag
Fig.159 - Incoming packets at Lan1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incom-
ing status.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
221
24 LINEUP OF LIM FOR EAST/WEST REPEATER
WITH DROP/INSERT
24.1 GENERAL
This paragraph deals with lineup of LIM for east/west repeater with details of SCT/LCT program related
only to cross connection facilities offered by internal cross connection matrix.
Assuming that the radio link is already in service, the following items are described:
baseband configuration
east or west configuration
east or west presetting
tributary enabling
one direction tributary connection
protected tributary connection (drop/insert)
protection setting (Rx tributary switch).
pass through E1 connection
The 2 Mbit/s streams connected to front panel of cross connection unit are called Tributaries while the 2
Mbit/s streams connected to matrix east side or west side are called E1.
24.2 BASEBAND CONFIGURATION
Operations
4
to enable the facilities offered by internal cross connection matrix are the following:
inside LCT, open Equipment General window as in Fig.160.
in Baseband Configuration field, select EW 16x2.
4 Each command has to be applied and confirmed (push Apply button and Confirm button)
222
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.160 - Baseband configuration
24.3 EAST/WEST CONFIGURATION
Operations to configure the radio link toward one direction are the following:
inside LCT, open Equipment General East (or West) window as in Fig.161
select proper parameters in Capacity&Modulation Scheme field and right Link ID in Local Link ID
field (0 means not used).
Configuration of one direction can be different respect the other: if different capacities are selected,
number of passthrough connection depend on this.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
223
Fig.161 - Configuration of radio branch of one direction
24.4 EAST OR WEST PRESETTING
In case of bad quality of Rx signal from one direction, HBER on east or west branch, some features can be
enabled: inside LCT as in Fig.162, open Equipment, open Gen. Preset East (or West) and:
in order to insert AIS in case of HBER: select Enable in Hber > Rx Ais Ins Rx Sw field
in order to insert AIS in case of hardware failure in Rx: select Enable in Ais Rx Insertion field
in order to cut the signal of service channels in case of HBER: select Enable in Service Squelch field
224
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.162 - Presetting of radio branch of one direction
24.5 TRIBUTARY ENABLING
In order to enable/disable the tributaries connected to the crossconnection unit, inside LCT as in Fig.163,
open Base Band, open Tributary and click on central square of each tributary:
central line open: the tributary is disabled
central line closed: the tributary is enabled.
If the rectangle with a little black triangle is clicked, four alarms relevant the tributary appear: AIS, BER
(BER = 10
6
), OOF (Out Of Frame), OOMF (Out of MultiFrame).
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
225
Fig.163 - Tributary enabling window
24.6 ONE DIRECTION TRIBUTARY CONNECTION
The procedure to enable one tributary connection towards one direction is the following: inside LCT as in
Fig.164 open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the slot of the tributary on the
slot relevant the desired E1.
Fig.164 - Cross connection window in a link with East and West sides configured as 4x2 Mbit/s
226
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
24.7 PROTECTED TRIBUTARY CONNECTION
A protected tributary connection is a tributary connection towards both direction where one direction is a
protection for the other ( a sort of Drop/Insert in a PDH ring).
Procedure: inside LCT as in Fig.165 open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the
slot relevant the tributary z on the slot relevant the desired E1 x first in one direction and after for the
other on the slot relevant the desired E1 y. Position of involved E1 can be different (for example: x y
z).
Fig.165 - Protected tributary connection (Drop/Insert in a PDH ring) in a link with East and
West configured as 16x2 Mbit/s
24.8 PROTECTION SETTING (Rx E1 SWITCH)
In a protected tributary connection one direction can be the preferential in Rx E1 switch or can be selected
manually. Protection policy setting: inside LCT as in Fig.166, open Cross Connection, select Configura-
tion and double click the tributary slot whose protection policy we want to set.
Preferential switch:
Auto One of the two E1 is selected in Rx. In case of E1 alarmed, the switch selects the one without
alarms
E1 East E1 east is selected in Rx if both E1 are without alarms
E1 West E1 west is selected in Rx if both E1 are without alarms
Forced switch:
Auto One of the two E1 is selected in Rx. In case of E1 alarmed, the switch selects the one without
alarms
E1 East E1 east is selected
E1 West E1 west is selected.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
227
Fig.166 - Protection policy of a tributary stream
24.9 PASSTHROUGH E1 CONNECTION
A passthrough E1 connection is a connection between one East E1 stream and one West E1 stream.
How to set a Passthrough E1 connection: inside LCT as in Fig.167, open Cross Connection, select Con-
figuration and drag and drop the slot relevant the East E1 on the slot relevant the West E1. East and West
E1 can be different.
Fig.167 - East/West Passthrough connection in a link with East and West configured as 16x2
Mbit/s
228
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
229
Section 5.
MAINTENANCE
25 PERIODICAL CHECKS
25.1 GENERAL
Periodical checks are used to check correct operation of the radio equipment without the presence of any
alarm condition.
The SCT/LCT programs running on the PC are used for the purpose.
25.2 CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT
The following checks must be carried out:
check of the trasmitted power;
check of the received field strenght (the reading must match the value resulting from hop calcula-
tions);
check of the bit error ratio and the hop performances.
For checking procedures, please refer to SCT/LCT program and relevant helpon line.
230
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
26 TROUBLESHOOTING
26.1 GENERAL
The AL equipment consists of the following replaceable parts:
LIM
RIM
CONTROLLER
ODU.
Purpose of the troubleshooting is to pinpoint the faulty part and replace it with spare.
Warning: the replacement of the faulty CONTROLLER module with spare causes the spare CONTROLLER
to be reprogrammed. To the purpose refer to chapter 20 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) and 21 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF
THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323) for the relevant procedure.
26.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
Troubleshooting starts as soon as one of the following alarm condition: IDU/ODU/REM is switched ON on
the IDU panel from (see Fig.168) or alarm messages are displayed by managers SCT/LCT.
Two methods are used to troubleshoot the cause of fault:
loop facilities
alarm message processing using the manager SCT/LCT
26.2.1 Loop facilities
The equipment is provided with different loops with the aid to locate the faulty equipment and then the
faulty module the equipment consists of.
Warning: the majority of loops causes the traffic to be lost.
The available loops are the following:
local tributary loops: usually used to test the cables interfacing the equipment upstreams
remote tributary loops: usually used to test the two direction link performance making use of an
unused 2 Mbit/s signal.
baseband loop: it permits to test the LIM circuits
IDU loop: it permits to test the complete IDU
RF loop: it permits to test the complete radio terminal
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
231
26.2.2 Alarm messages processing
When an alarm condition occurs, the equipment generates a number of alarm messages that appear on
the SCT windows ie: log history area and equipment view current alarm.
Investigation on the alarm message meaning permits to troubleshoot the faulty module.
Alarm message organisation
The alarms (traps) are organized as alarm grouping relevant to a specific functions performed by the equip-
ment.
The alarm grouping is available only in the view current alarm submenu.
What follows is the list of the alarm grouping:
COMMON alarms which are not related to a specific part of the equipment but relevant to the link
as EOC radio link alarm or link telemetry fail. If these alarms are ON the link is lost. Investigation
must be made on a possible bad propagation or equipment failure. See the condition of the others
alarm grouping.
LIM This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:
- external fault: tributary loss signal
- LIM failure: i.e. multiplexer/demultiplexer failure or modulator/demodulator failure.
Warning: The modulator/demodulator circuitry is spread into the LIM and RIM modules. Substi-
tution method is the only way to pingpoint the faulty module
- alarm that can be propagated by RIM or ODU modules as baseband Rx alarm.
The Baseband loop permits to discover if the cause of this alarm activation is external or internal
to the LIM. If yes the module must be replaced.
RIM This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:
- external fault: demodulator fail alarm and local ODU alarm are generated when the ODU be-
comes faulty.
- RIM failure power supply alarm along with cable short/open alarms or modulator/demodulator
alarms are activated.
Warning: the modulator/demodulator circuitry is spread into the LIM and RIM modules. Substi-
tution methods is the only way to pinpoint the faulty module.
RT This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:
- external fault: Rx power low alarm is generated given by a bad propagation or by a faulty remote
terminal.
- ODU failure: PSU fail alarm or RF VCO alarm or RT IF alarm is activated. If this happens, replace
the ODU.
UNIT This grouping generates alarms when one of the units, the equipment consists of, is faulty
or does not respond to the controller polling. Replace the faulty unit.
CONTROLLER There is not an alarm message relevant to a controller module failure. An alarm
condition causes Led IDU to steady lights up.
Warning: The replacement of controller module requires the spare to be realigned (see chapter 20
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308,
V32309) or 21 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
(KIT V32323)).
Fig.168 - IDU front
1 UNITA'
Trib: M-N-O-P Trib: I-J-K-L Trib: E-F-G-H
2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s
Trib: A-B-C-D
FAIL
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
TX RX
1
2
SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1
Q3
RS232 USER IN/OUT LCT
A
WAY
Alarm area
232
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
27 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/SAVE/
DOWNLOAD. PARAMETER MODIFICATION AND
CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS.
27.1 SCOPE
This chapter describes the procedure to create configuration files.
Equipment configuration files must be used in case of replacing a faulty CONTROLLER module with the
spare. To the purpose it is necessary to upload, from each equipment the network consists of, equipment
configurations and save them on three configuration files.
It is advisable to do it upon the first installation. Configuration file download on the spare CONTROLLER
permits to restore previous operating condition. It is also possible to create virtual configuration without
being connected to equipment.
27.2 PROCEDURE
To configure the spare CONTROLLER the following must be uploaded/saved on the file/downloaded:
general equipment configuration
addresses and routing table
remote element table
To do it, run the SCT/LCT program (see relevant documentation available on line) until Subnetwork Craft
Terminal application window is displayed.
27.2.1 General equipment configuration
Upload and save
1 Select Open Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools Equipment
Configuration Wizard File Open Configuration Template.
The system will show Template Selection window.
2 Choose from Template Selection window the type of equipment and version (for instance radio PDH
AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s) from which you want to make the upload.
3 Press OK.
The system will display the Configuration Wizard window referring to the selected type of equipment
and version (example: radio PDH AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s)
4 Press Upload push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment.
The system will display the Upload Configuration File window. The window will show the equipment
list.
5 Select the equipment you wish to upload a configuration file from (normally the local quipment) by
activating the relevant box.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
233
6 Press OK.
The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out:
- the operation status: upload in progress/complete.
- errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.
At the end of the operation by pressing OK, the system displays, the uploaded equipment parame-
ters present into the Configuration Wizard window.
7 Save the uploaded configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File Save
Save File As.
The system will display Save This Config. File.
Type the file name into the proper box (with cfg extension) and set the path to be used to save
the file.
8 Press Save push button to finish.
Download
After having installed the spare LIM proceed as follows:
1 Select Open File from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu Equipment Configuration
Wizard File Open Open File.
The system will display Select a Config. File window.
2 Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the file
content.
3 Press Download push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File.
4 Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to download configuration file to (normally the
local equipment) and select Configure Equipment as Current File.
5 Press OK.
The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out:
- the operation status: upload in progress/completed
- errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of operation are displayed.
6 Press OK to finish.
27.2.2 Addresses and routing table
Upload and save
1 Select Open Address Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu
Equipment Configuration Wizard File Open Open Address Configuration Template .
The system will show the mask of the Address Comfiguration Template.
2 Press Upload push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment.
The system will display the Upload Configuration File window.
3 Select the equipment you wish to upload a configuration from (normally the local equipment).
4 Press OK.
The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out:
- the operation status: upload in progress
- errors area: where error messages relavant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.
At the end of the operation, the system displays, the equipment parameter present into the Con-
figuration Wizard window.
5 Save the uploaded configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File Save
Save File As
234
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
The system will display the Save This Config. File window. Into the proper boxes type the file name
(with cfg extension) and set the path to be used to save the file.
6 Press Save push button to finish.
Download
1 Select Open File command from Tools menu following this path: Tools Equipment Configuration
Wizard File Open Open File.
The system will display Select a Config. File window.
2 Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the pa-
rameters contained into the file.
3 Press Download push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File.
4 Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to download configuration file to (normally the
local equipment).
5 Press OK.
The system will display Download Type Selection window. Activate boxes IP port addresses config-
uration e Routing table. If OSPF facility is enabled, you can only select Standard (IP/Communi-
cation/OSPF) Settings.
6 Press OK.
The system will show a warning indicating the possibility to procede the download or not.
7 Press OK.
The system will show the Download in progress.
8 At the end of the download will be shown the file content.
27.2.3 Remote Element Table
Upload and save
1 Select window Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tools.
2 Select equipment Local from Actual Configuration Area and then press Retrieve. In New configu-
ration area is shown the list of remote equipment included the local.
3 Press Save to file. The system will show window Save remote element configuration file.
4 Save the file with Rel extension and then press Save to finish.
Download
1 Select Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tool.
2 Press Read from file and then select the desired file (with Rel extension).
3 Press Open push button and then the system will show the file content into the New Configuration
Area.
4 Select into the Actual configuration area the equipment you desire to download, the list of the re-
mote element included the local.
5 Press Send to send the list.
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
235
28 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PA-
RAMETERS
28.1 SCOPE
This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.
28.2 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD
Foreword: it is advisable to upload the configuration during the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1 Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wiz-
ard window will be displayed.
2 Select Upload and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection win-
dow will be displayed.
3 Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).
4 Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from Upload Configuration File window.
5 Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window.
6 Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word done showing the procedure success.
7 Press OK to finish.
28.3 CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD
Once the spare LIM has been installed proceed as follows:
1 Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard
window will be displayed.
2 Select Download and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Config-
uration Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed.
3 Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Download Configuration
File window will be displayed.
4 Select the equipment to download and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The
word done indicates that download has been successfully.
5 Press OK to finish.
Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.
236
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
237
Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVI-
SION
29 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
29.1 GENERAL
The radio equipment was designed to be easily programmed and supervised.
The following tools are implemented to the purpose:
SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal + LCT Local Craft Terminal. They are used for remote and local con-
trol of a subnetwork consisted of a maximum of 100 AL radio equipment.
NMS5UX Network Management. It is used for the remote control of an entire network consisted of
different SIAE equipment including AL family radio equipment.
For details refer to relevant documentation. SCT/LCT documentation is available as help online.
238
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
239
Section 7.
COMPOSITION
30 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT
30.1 GENERAL
The IDU is available in following versions:
1+0 unduplicated
1+0/1+1 standard (see Fig.169)
1+1 ethernet high and low capacity
1+1 full duplicated
1+1 high capacity (see Fig.170)
2+0 repeater E/W (see Fig.171).
The 1+0 version is considered the minimum replaceable part while the 1+1 standard/full duplicated con-
sists of plugin modules as LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER that can individually be replaced.
Module part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
30.2 IDU PART NUMBER
Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.172) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.
The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:
240
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Tab.56- IDU part number
30.3 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT
1+0/1+1 standard, Ethernet version
The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules madeup in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal label indicating the relevant P/N.
The P/Ns are the following:
- LIM D12034 option SUB_D 75 ohm
D12035 option SUBD 120 ohm
D1203602 option 1.0/2.3/75 ohm
D1208902 Ethernet 64 Mbit/s (low capacity)
D12100 Ethernet 100 Mbit/s (high capacity)
- RIM D12037
D26000 100 Mbit/s
- CONTROLLER D12031 RJ45
D12032 BNC
D12033 AUI
1+1 2 units
The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules madeup in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
- LIM D1203602 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm
D12086 expansion trib. 17 to 32 75 Ohm
- RIM D12037
- CONTROLLER D12031 RJ45
D12032 BNC
D12033 AUI
D12094 coldfire BNC (LCT USB in AL E/W)
Digit Letter/number Meaning
1 G
Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical
structure
2 A AL equipment
3 I Indoor installation
4 to 7
0001
0002
0003
0004
0052
0054
00611
0062
0066
1+1 1 unit 120 ohm BNC
1+1 1 unit 120 ohm RJ45
1+1 1 unit 75 ohm BNC 1.0/2.3
1+0 1 unit 120 ohm RJ45
1+1 2 unit 120 ohm BNC Full protected
1+1 2 unit 75 ohm BNC 32x2 1.0/2.3
1+1 1 unit Ethernet 75 ohm 1.0/2.3 64 Mbit/s RJ45
2+0 2 unit E/W 75 ohm BNC 1.0/2.3
1+1 1 unit Ethernet 75 ohm 1.0/2.3 100 Mbit/s RJ45
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
241
2+0 2 units
The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules madeup in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
- LIM D12089 matrix in AL E/W 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm
D1205202 processor unit
- RIM D12037
- CONTROLLER D12094 coldfire BNC (LCT USB in AL E/W)
Fig.169 - Standard IDU GAI0003
Fig.170 - IDU GAI0054
Fig.171 - IDU GAI0062
Fig.172 - IDU P/N
R
IDUODU
TEST REM
TXRX
1
2 SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1
Q3
RS232 LCT
A
WAY
USER IN/OUT
FAIL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
RIM
RIM
1
2
+
-
-
+
2
1
RIM
RIM
RIM
RIM
1
2
+
-
-
+
2
1
RIM
RIM
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FAIL
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
FAIL
Q3
WAY A
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE
2
1
RX TX
REMTEST
ODU IDU
R
+
RIM
RIM
1
2
2
1
RIM
RIM
FAIL
FAIL
Q3
WAY A
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE
RX TX
REMTEST
ODU IDU
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FAIL
242
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
31 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT IDU PLUS
31.1 GENERAL
The IDU Plus is available in 1RU and 2RU. Main configurations are:
terminal
drop/insert
nodal.
Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition can change without notice.
31.2 IDU PLUS PART NUMBER
Each version id identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.178), attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply information are also written.
The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:
Tab.57 - IDU Plus part number
31.3 COMPOSITION OF THE IDU PLUS
The IDU Plus consits of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER/MATRIX modules made-up in different versions. Each mod-
ule is identified through internal label indicating the relevant P/N.
The P/Ns are the following:
- LIM D12139 53x2 processor
D12137 LIM 32E1
- RIM D26001
Digit Letter/number Description
1 G
Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical
structure
2 A AL equipment
3 I Indoor installation
from 4 to 7
0115
0116
0123
0124
0126
1RU, 32E1, 1+0 terminal
1RU, 32E1, 1+1 terminal
2RU, 53E1, 1+1 terminal
2RU, STM1, E1 nodale
2RU, 32E1, drop/insert
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
243
- MATRIX D12146 Matrix node STM1 16E1
- EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER D12148 Equipment controller
Subrack can be 1RU (see Fig.173) or 2RU (see Fig.174) high.
Fig.173 - IDU Plus 1RU composition
Fig.174 - IDU Plus 2RU composizione
31.3.1 1+0 1RU 32E1 Terminal
The IDU consits of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified
through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
Example: GAI 0115
- position 1 LIM D12137
- position 2 RIM D26001
- position 3 Eq. controller D12148
31.3.2 1+1 1RU 32E1 terminal
The IDU consits of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified
through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
Example: GAI 0116
- position 1 LIM D12137
- position 3 RIM D26001
- position 4 RIM D26001
- position 2 Eq. controller D12148
Fig.175 - IDU Plus 1+1 terminal
1 3
2 4
1 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
+-
- +
Q3/1
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1 RS232 USER IN/OUT LCT
A
WAY
Q3/2
FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
244
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
31.3.3 1+1 terminale 2RU 53E1
The IDU consits of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified
through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
Example: GAI 0123
- position 1 Eq. controller D12148
- position 2 LIM D12137
- position 3 53E1 expansion D12151
- position 5 RIM D26001
- position 6 RIM D26001
Fig.176 - 53E1 1+1 terminal
31.3.4 2RU 32E1 drop/insert
The IDU consits of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified
through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
Example: GAI 0126
- position 1 Eq. controller D12148
- position 2 53E1 processor D12139
- position 3 Matrix 32E1 D12143
- position 5,6 RIM D26001
Fig.177 - Drop/insert IDU Plus 32E1
31.3.5 Nodal 2RU STM1 E1
The IDU consits of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identified
through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.
FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
Q3/2
WAY
A
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
SIDE
REM TEST
ODU IDU
R
Q3/1
+-
- +
FAIL
Trib: 33-40 Trib: 41-48 Trib: 49-53
Q3/1
R
IDU ODU
TEST REM
SIDE
2Mb/s CH2 CH1 RS232 USER IN/OUT LCT
A
WAY
Q3/2
+-
- +
FAIL
FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
245
- position 1 Eq. controller D12148
- position 2 53E1 processor D12139
- position 3 Matrix node STM1 16E1D12146
- position 4 53E1 processor D12139
- position 5,6,7,8 RIM D26001
Fig.178 - IDU Plus P/N
246
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
32 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT
32.1 GENERAL
The ODU consists of a mechanical structure that houses all the transceiver circuitry. In 1+1 version the
connection to the antenna is performed through a passive hybrid.
Both transceiver and hybrid are offered in different versions depending on the operating bands, the anten-
na configuration etc...
A label (see Fig.179) attached on the ODU structure shows the most significant parameters as go/return
frequency value, subband, operating band and part number.
From ODU name (e.g. AL18 or AS18) you can see the version of used ODU.
For example the P/N GA0001/001, shown by the label, identifies the following:
- AL18 18 GHz operating band
- G/R 1010 MHz go/return frequency value
- SB 1L operating subband low
- S/N serial number
- DATA CODE month and year
A further label is available attached on the hybrid body as per example of Fig.180.
It shows the position of each transceiver and the type of coupler, balanced or unbalanced.
Warning: In case of unbalanced type the lowest loss is always referred to branch 1.
In Tab.58 various ODU versions and hybrid part number are listed.
Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
Tab.58 - Example of ODU part number and hybrid part number
RF Band in GHz
ODU Hybrid with support
1L 1H Balanced Unbalanced
13 GA9018 GA9019 V32218 V32219
18 GA9000 GA9001 V32184 V32185
23 GA9006 GA9007 V32186 V32187
38 GA9014 GA9015 V32210 V32230
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
247
Fig.179 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL
GA0001/001
248
AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.180 - Position of the label on the hybrid body and typical hybrid characteristics
AL - MN.00107.E - 017 249
Section 8.
LISTS AND SERVICES
33 LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 12
Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 12
Fig.3 - Coiled cord......................................................................................................... 12
Fig.4 - Laser indication................................................................................................... 12
Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 13
Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna ............................................ 23
Fig.7 - 1+1 IDU typical configuration 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s ...................................... 23
Fig.8 - 1+1 equipment block diagram............................................................................... 24
Fig.9 - 1+0 non expandable equipment block diagram........................................................ 25
Fig.10 - 1+1 IDU standard configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors ........................ 32
Fig.11 - 1+1 IDU standard Ethernet tributary connectors ................................................. 32
Fig.12 - 1+1 IDU standard D type tributary connectors.................................................... 33
Fig.13 - 1+1 IDU (34, 2x34 Mbit/s) ................................................................................. 33
Fig.14 - 1+1 IDU high capacity configuration Micro coaxial tributary connectors.................. 33
Fig.15 - 1+1 IDU high capacity configuration D type tributary connectors........................... 33
Fig.16 - IDU Plus 1U - 32x2 Mbit/s .................................................................................. 33
Fig.17 - IDU Plus 1+1 2U - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1 nodale 4+0 .............................................. 33
Fig.18 IDU Plus 1+1 2U (up to 53x2 Mbit/s)...................................................................... 34
Fig.19 - 1+0 ODU AL with separated antenna (pole mounting) ............................................ 34
Fig.20 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna.................................................................... 34
Fig.21 - 1+0 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting) ............................................... 35
Fig.22 - 1+1 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting) ............................................... 35
Fig.23 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna (wall mounting)............................................. 36
250 AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.24 - ODU AS 1+1 with separated antenna ................................................................... 37
Fig.25 - LIM block diagram Tx side................................................................................ 51
Fig.26 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing.......................................................... 52
Fig.27 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 52
Fig.28 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 52
Fig.29 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 53
Fig.30 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing............................................................... 54
Fig.31 - 32x2 multiplexing/demultiplexing ........................................................................ 55
Fig.32 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s ............................................................... 55
Fig.33 - LIM block diagram Rx side ............................................................................... 56
Fig.34 - RIM block diagram............................................................................................. 57
Fig.35 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 58
Fig.36 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 59
Fig.37 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 60
Fig.38 - IDU + 1RU composition...................................................................................... 61
Fig.39 - IDU + 2RU composition...................................................................................... 62
Fig.40 - IDU Plus 2RU drop/insert and nodal structure........................................................ 64
Fig.41 - Nodal connections ............................................................................................. 65
Fig.42 - LIM block diagram - Tx side ................................................................................ 72
Fig.43 - LIM block diagram - Rx side................................................................................ 73
Fig.44 - RIM block diagram............................................................................................. 74
Fig.45 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 75
Fig.46 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 75
Fig.47 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 76
Fig.48 - LIM block diagram Tx side................................................................................ 89
Fig.49 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing.......................................................... 90
Fig.50 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 90
Fig.51 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 90
Fig.52 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 91
Fig.53 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing............................................................... 92
Fig.54 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s ............................................................... 92
Fig.55 - LIM block diagram Rx side ............................................................................... 93
Fig.56 - RIM block diagram............................................................................................. 94
Fig.57 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 95
Fig.58 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 95
Fig.59 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 96
Fig.60 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram.................................................................... 97
Fig.61 - Tag control into field .......................................................................................... 98
Fig.62 - Output queues .................................................................................................. 98
Fig.63 - ToS/DSCP tag position into IP packets.................................................................. 98
Fig.64 - ToS/DSCP......................................................................................................... 99
Fig.65 - IDU for E/W repeater ....................................................................................... 100
Fig.66 - Block diagram of IDU with Cross Connection Matrix.............................................. 104
AL - MN.00107.E - 017 251
Fig.67 - RIM block diagram........................................................................................... 108
Fig.68 - Main and peripheral controller connection ........................................................... 109
Fig.69 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack .............................................................................. 110
Fig.70 - IDU E/W loops ................................................................................................ 111
Fig.71 - 1+0 AL ODU .................................................................................................. 117
Fig.72 - 1+1 AL ODU ................................................................................................... 117
Fig.73 - 1+0 AS or Universal ODU version ...................................................................... 118
Fig.74 - ODU block diagram (both versions).................................................................... 119
Fig.75 - 1+1 hot standby 1 antenna............................................................................. 120
Fig.76 - 1+1 hot standby 2 antennas ........................................................................... 120
Fig.77 - ATPC operation ............................................................................................... 121
Fig.78 - Grounding connection ...................................................................................... 125
Fig.79 - User connector position, 1+0/1+1 standard version ............................................. 127
Fig.80 - User connector posistion 1+0/1+1 standard version with Ethernet and 2 Mbit/s....... 127
Fig.81 - User connector position for IDU 1+0 compact (2, 2x2, 4x2 Mbit/s)......................... 127
Fig.82 - User connector position for IDU 1+0 compact (2, 2x2, 4x2, 8x2 Mbit/s).................. 127
Fig.83 - IDU Plus 1+1 (2x2 - 32x2 Mbit/s) ...................................................................... 135
Fig.84 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 53x2 Mbit/s) ...................................................................... 135
Fig.85 - Pin-out Tributary IN/OUT 50 SCSI...................................................................... 136
Fig.86 - Antisliding strip ............................................................................................... 144
Fig.87 - 60114 mm pole supporting plate fixing ............................................................. 145
Fig.88 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole............................................................................ 146
Fig.89 - Mounting position ............................................................................................ 147
Fig.90 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism ....................... 148
Fig.91 - Band-it pole mounting kit ................................................................................. 149
Fig.92 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate ................................................. 150
Fig.93 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 151
Fig.94 - ODU body reference tooth ................................................................................ 152
Fig.95 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................... 153
Fig.96 - ODU grounding ............................................................................................... 154
Fig.97 - Wall supporting plate ....................................................................................... 158
Fig.98 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism.......................................................... 159
Fig.99 - Mounting possible positions............................................................................... 160
Fig.100 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate................................................ 161
Fig.101 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 162
Fig.102 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 163
Fig.103 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version.................................................................. 164
Fig.104 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 165
Fig.105 - Centering ring position ................................................................................... 170
Fig.106 - Antislide strip................................................................................................ 171
Fig.107 - Support mount on pole................................................................................... 172
Fig.108 - Supporting system position ............................................................................. 173
252 AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Fig.109 - Hole E .......................................................................................................... 173
Fig.110 - Antenna installation on pole support................................................................. 174
Fig.111 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.................................................................... 174
Fig.112 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence ........................ 175
Fig.113 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 176
Fig.114 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization ............................................. 177
Fig.115 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization.......................................... 177
Fig.116 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 178
Fig.117 - Hybrid mount on pole support ......................................................................... 179
Fig.118 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version........................................................ 180
Fig.119 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments.................................................................. 181
Fig.120 - Antenna aiming block..................................................................................... 182
Fig.121 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 183
Fig.122 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 188
Fig.123 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 189
Fig.124 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisa-
tion is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 189
Fig.125 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 190
Fig.126 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 191
Fig.127 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 192
Fig.128 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 193
Fig.129 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 194
Fig.130 - Hybrid installation.......................................................................................... 195
Fig.131 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 196
Fig.132 - Pole installation of the support......................................................................... 199
Fig.133 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole support (only for 1+1 version) ..................... 200
Fig.134 - Installation of the ODU on the support.............................................................. 201
Fig.135 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna ..................... 202
Fig.136 - Detected voltage versus Rf received signal ........................................................ 205
Fig.137 - Local Lan1 port to remote Lan1 port connection ............................................. 206
Fig.138 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput ..................................................................... 207
Fig.139 - Tributary enable ............................................................................................ 207
Fig.140 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 208
Fig.141 - Lan1 interface settings.................................................................................. 209
Fig.142 - Vlan settings for Lan1................................................................................... 209
Fig.143 - Priority setting for Lan1 and Internal Port ........................................................ 210
Fig.144 - Vlan settings for Internal Port.......................................................................... 210
Fig.145 - Vlan Configuration Table................................................................................. 211
Fig.146 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan1 port ............................................ 212
Fig.147 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans ......................................................... 212
Fig.148 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged ....................... 213
Fig.149 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management ......................................................... 213
Fig.150 - 3 to 1 port connections................................................................................... 214
AL - MN.00107.E - 017 253
Fig.151 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan1 port............................................... 215
Fig.152 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301............................................................... 215
Fig.153 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration......................................................... 216
Fig.154 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DSCP priority................................... 216
Fig.155 - Output properties of VLAN 701 ........................................................................ 217
Fig.156 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan................................... 218
Fig.157 - Queue selection............................................................................................. 219
Fig.158 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag............................ 220
Fig.159 - Incoming packets at Lan1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming
status. ........................................................................................................................ 220
Fig.160 - Baseband configuration .................................................................................. 222
Fig.161 - Configuration of radio branch of one direction.................................................... 223
Fig.162 - Presetting of radio branch of one direction ........................................................ 224
Fig.163 - Tributary enabling window .............................................................................. 225
Fig.164 - Cross connection window in a link with East and West sides configured as 4x2 Mbit/s ...
225
Fig.165 - Protected tributary connection (Drop/Insert in a PDH ring) in a link with East and West
configured as 16x2 Mbit/s ............................................................................................. 226
Fig.166 - Protection policy of a tributary stream.............................................................. 227
Fig.167 - East/West Passthrough connection in a link with East and West configured as 16x2 Mbit/
s................................................................................................................................ 227
Fig.168 - IDU front ...................................................................................................... 231
Fig.169 - Standard IDU GAI0003................................................................................... 241
Fig.170 - IDU GAI0054 ................................................................................................ 241
Fig.171 - IDU GAI0062 ................................................................................................ 241
Fig.172 - IDU P/N........................................................................................................ 241
Fig.173 - IDU Plus 1RU composition............................................................................... 243
Fig.174 - IDU Plus 2RU composizione............................................................................. 243
Fig.175 - IDU Plus 1+1 terminal .................................................................................... 243
Fig.176 - 53E1 1+1 terminal......................................................................................... 244
Fig.177 - Drop/insert IDU Plus 32E1 .............................................................................. 244
Fig.178 - IDU Plus P/N................................................................................................. 245
Fig.179 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL ................................................. 247
Fig.180 - Position of the label on the hybrid body and typical hybrid characteristics.............. 248
254 AL - MN.00107.E - 017
AL - MN.00107.E - 017 255
34 LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................11
Tab.2 - Transmission capacity..........................................................................................27
Tab.3 - TDM plus Ethernet mixed transport structure ..........................................................27
Tab.4 - Modulation used according to bit rate and RF channel space......................................28
Tab.5 - Modulation, capacity, channeling and size for IDU Plus .............................................29
Tab.6 - Nominal output power 1 dB tolerance - (1+0 version) ODU AL/ODU AS .....................29
Tab.7 - Threshold 2x2, 4x2 Mbit/s ....................................................................................30
Tab.8 - Threshold 8x2 ..... 100 Mbit/s ...............................................................................30
Tab.9 - Power consumption .............................................................................................31
Tab.10 - IDU consumption...............................................................................................31
Tab.11 - Guaranteed consumption for power supply connector ............................................31
Tab.12 - IDU/ODU dimensions .........................................................................................32
Tab.13 - IDU/ODU weight................................................................................................32
Tab.14 - Optical interface characteristics ...........................................................................40
Tab.15 - Aggregate frame ...............................................................................................46
Tab.16 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................47
Tab.17 - IDU Plus possible terminal configurations..............................................................62
Tab.18 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................67
Tab.19 - Aggregate frame ...............................................................................................78
Tab.20 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................79
Tab.21 - Nominal output power 1 dB tolerance (1+0 version) AL ODU/AS ODU..................... 113
Tab.22 - Transmit alarm priority..................................................................................... 116
Tab.23 - Characteristics of the cables.............................................................................. 124
Tab.24 - Tributary connector pinout .............................................................................. 128
Tab.25 - 100BaseT connector pinout for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin Description... 129
Tab.26 - LCT connector pinout for connection to supervision system.................................. 129
Tab.27 - RSR232 connector pinout for supervision system ............................................... 129
Tab.28 - Q3 AUI connector pinout for Ethernet connection ............................................... 130
Tab.29 - CH1 connector pinout for 9600 bit/s V.24 interface.......................................... 130
Tab.30 - CH1 connector pinout for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface...................... 130
Tab.31 - CH2 connector pinout for 64 kbit/s channel V.11 interface ................................ 131
Tab.32 - 2 Mbit/s connector pinout ............................................................................... 131
Tab.33 - User in/out connector pinout for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside 131
Tab.34 - Tributary connector pinout .............................................................................. 132
Tab.35 - User in/out connector pinout for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside 133
Tab.36 - RS232 connector pinout for connection to/from supervision system...................... 133
Tab.37 - Q3 connector pinout for 10BaseT Ethernet connection......................................... 133
256 AL - MN.00107.E - 017
Tab.38 - Q3 AUI connector pinout for Ethernet connection ............................................... 134
Tab.39 - CH1 connector pinout for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface...................... 134
Tab.40 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm .............................................................................. 135
Tab.41 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm............................................................................. 137
Tab.42 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection ... 138
Tab.43 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface............................................................... 138
Tab.44 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface........................... 139
Tab.45 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface ......................... 139
Tab.46 - CH1 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface......................... 139
Tab.47 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface ................................. 140
Tab.48 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out .................................................................... 140
Tab.49 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out.......................................................................... 140
Tab.50 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 142
Tab.51 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 143
Tab.52 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 156
Tab.53 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 156
Tab.54 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 168
Tab.55 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 187
Tab.56 - IDU part number .............................................................................................. 240
Tab.57 - IDU Plus part number...................................................................................... 242
Tab.58 - Example of ODU part number and hybrid part number.......................................... 246
AL - MN.00107.E - 017 257
35 ASSISTANCE SERVICE
The assistance service provided by Siae Microelettronica will be in compliance, if stipulated, to what spe-
cified in the Agreement of Software Maintenance.
To exploit this service, fill in all its parts the Module for the notification of bad SW operation
(RQ.00961) and send it to the following address:
SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A
via Michelangelo Buonarroti, 21
20093 Cologno Monzese
Milano - Italy
www.siaemic.it
Fax + (39) 02 25391585
e-mail siaemi@siaemic.it
35.1 RQ.00961 MODULE
Each RQ916 module can contain at most one signalling.
The information required for the signalling of the bad operation.
Warning. The compiling of the parts General Information (Siae only), Trouble notified by, Reserved to Siae
Department and Validation manager are at charge of the Siae personnel.
Section Trouble Identification
- SIAE product name. Identifier or SIAE code of the product whose bad operation has been detected.
- Version. Version of the sw product whose bad operation has been detected
- Documentation Type. Identifier of the document where the problem has been detected.
- Revision. Revision of the document where the problem has been detected.
- Volume N. Number of the volume of the document where the problem has been detected.
- Page N. Number of the page, into the volume, where the problem has been detected.
- Typology. Severity of the detected bad operation:
- Critical, if it prevents the use of a main functionality of the product;
- Important, if it prevents the use of a secondary functionality of the product;
- Disturbing, if occasionally and in difficultly reproducible conditions, it prevents the use of a main
functionality of the product;
- Minor, if very seldom it prevents the use of a secondary functionality without important conse-
quences;
- Suggestion, if no functionality of the product is damaged but some aspects (e.g.: user interface)
can be improved.
- Recurrent. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) to cause the bad operation after the same sequence of inputs
given to the product.
- Repeatable. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) to reproduce the detected bad operation.
- Annexes. Possibility (Yes) or not (No) of annexed to the NM and their possible number.
258 AL - MN.00107.E - 017
- Title. Title of the bad operation.
- Description. Clear and concise description of the bad operation, comprehensive of the edge condi-
tions and, when possible and applicable, of the reference to the test (identifier and version of the
technical documentation, test identifier).
GENERAL INFORMATION (SIAE ONLY)
Obj ect
Software Documentation Hardware
Number
Submitted
Distribution List: Quality Assurance
TROUBLE NOTIFIED BY
Siae Operator Name _______________________________ Date _______________________________
Customer Report Ref. _______________________________ Date _______________________________
Customer Name Reference _______________________________ Tel _______________________________
Company/Dept. _______________________________ e-mail _______________________________
Contract N Address
TROUBLE IDENTIFICATION
SW/ FW failures
SIAE product name ___________________________________________________ Version ______
Documentation
Documentation type ___________________________________________________ Revision ______
Volume N. ___________________________________________________
Page N.
Typology Critical Important Disturbing Minor Suggestion
Recurrent Yes No
Repeatable Yes No
Annexes Yes: N No
Title:
Description ( including enviranmental conditions) :
RESERVED TO SIAE DEPARTMENT
Trouble
Accepted_ Open
Rej ected
Reasons
Notes
Analysis performed by Date Expected Closing Date
CORRECTI VE ACTI ON DESCRI PTI ON
FI XED Executed by Date Approved by
VALIDATION
MANAGER
MN Closed
Open
Verified by Date
Notes
Quality Record Module TROUBLE REPORT Issued by
Terzo L.
Approved by
Gaviraghi S.
Date
24/09/02
Page
1/1
Siae Microelettronica
all rights reserved.
Document Ref.
RQ.00961
Rev/Ver
003

You might also like